JP2019063654A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can preferably perform a display control.SOLUTION: When displaying multiple symbol display portions in semitransparent state in front of a presentation character, after placing object data for displaying the presentation character and each symbol display portion in a world coordinate system, drawing data corresponding to the presentation character and each symbol display portion is individually created. Specifically, after drawing data only for the presentation character is created in a drawing buffer, it is stored in the first storage buffer. Then, after drawing data only for each symbol display portion are created in the drawing buffer, each of them is stored in a second storage buffer to a fifth storage buffer. Further, semitransparent value data is set to the drawing data of each symbol display portion stored in the second to the fifth storage buffers and each drawing data after setting the semitransparent value data is overlapped with the drawing data of the presentation character stored in the first storage buffer.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 has a display means having a display unit,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage unit having a plurality of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage unit, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display unit. Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
Equipped with
The unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within the range up to the limit value,
The image data has a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information within the range up to the limit numerical value,
The display control means
When displaying a plurality of individual images so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, data of the unit setting area in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display unit Overlapping reflection means for causing back side image data, which is image data of the overlapping portion, to be reflected on the front side image data, which is image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual images,
When the back side image data is reflected on the front side image data by the overlapping reflection means, the reflection ratio of one of the reduction target image data of the front side image data and the back side image data is the front side Reflection reduction means for reducing the reduction amount according to the content of one of the reduction amount reference image data of the side image data and the back side image data
Equipped with
The reflection reduction means sets the unit image data to a value obtained by dividing the value obtained by subtracting the color information of the unit image data contained in the reduction reference image data from the limit value by the limit value. By integrating the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit setting area to be reduced, thereby reducing the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data,
The present invention is characterized in that there are cases where reduction by the reflection reduction means is performed and cases where it is not performed even when the same front side individual image is displayed on the display unit.

  According to the present invention, display control can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed by sound light side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a control pattern table. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the command transmitted to display CPU72 from sound light side MPU. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for describing contents instructed by each command data. It is a flowchart which shows the command selection process performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed by display CPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a command storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process performed by sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that adjustment of the pointer information of a table for execution is performed in relation to task processing. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. (A)-(c) It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of color change production. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the memory module for performing a color change production | presentation, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a color palette. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a color change presentation performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a color change presentation performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the writing process for a color change presentation performed by VDP. (A)-(e) It is an explanatory view for explaining effect production. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the effect presentation performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the effect presentation performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the writing process for the effect presentation performed by VDP. (A)-(e) It is an explanatory view for explaining development effect. It is a time chart which shows a mode that development effect is performed using each image data for effects. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the development effect performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the development effect performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating simultaneous display production, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing simultaneous display production, (c) The effect image for increase is displayed FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data to be used. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the image data for normal effects and the image data for simple effects are properly used as image data for displaying an increase time effect image. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for simultaneous display effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the simultaneous display performance performed by VDP. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state in which drawing data is created along with execution of drawing processing. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a loop effect. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining data composition for performing loop production, and (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining a combination table. It is a time chart which shows a mode that loop presentation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for loop effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an interpolation display period performed by display CPU. FIG. 18 is a time chart showing timings at which derivation of coordinate data by combination is started for a loop effect A character and a loop effect B character. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for loop effects performed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for front start object determination. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an interpolation display period performed by display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a bone | frame model display. It is an explanatory view for explaining data composition for performing bone model display. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating frame | skeleton data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area for coordinate calculation. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for bone model display effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the coordinate arithmetic processing performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for bone model display presentation performed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a group character group. It is an explanatory view for explaining frame data of each set unit character. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view for comparing each data volume of a character for bones display, and a set unit character. It is an explanatory view for explaining bone animation data for set. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement content of each set unit character. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a plane | planar shadow display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure required in order to perform a plane | planar shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the flat shadow display performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for plane shadow display performed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the form of another form of a plane shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the flat shadow display performed by display CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of level | step difference shadow display, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure required in order to perform a level difference shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the step shadow display performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the level difference shadow display performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of fluctuation display production, It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the area utilized when performing fluctuation display production in the buffer for expansion of (b) VRAM. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the fluctuation display production performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the fluctuation display effect performed by VDP. It is a flow chart which shows drawing data creation processing for change display production performed by VDP. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing data of the symbol display part preserve | saved at each buffer for preservation | save. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the drawing data of the image for fluctuation display effects is produced using the drawing data preserve | saved at each storage buffer. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of distortion background display. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data for performing a distortion background display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for distortion background display performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for distortion background display performed by VDP. It is a flow chart which shows refraction application processing performed by VDP.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as the pivoting base end and the right side as the pivoting tip side in front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be pivoted forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in a front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  The game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide means Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rails. The game ball emission mechanism performs a game ball emission operation by manually operating the emission operation device 28 provided in the front door frame 14.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a second operation opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, etc. ing.

  Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when entering the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when entering the first operation port 33 occurs or when entering the second operation port 34, three winning balls are paid out. When the entry to the general winning opening 31 occurs, the payout of 10 winning balls is executed, and when the entry to the special electric winning device 32 occurs, the payout of 15 winning balls is To be executed.

  The number of winning balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be a first operating port. The number of balls may be greater than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls which did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area PA without being discharged. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24 a clearly, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of the game ball to the is also expressed as a winning.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 33 and 34 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general-purpose utility product 34 a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the commercial power item 34a, the gaming ball can not win in the second operation port 34, and when the common electric symbol 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the second operating port 34.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the gaming ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning. Thereby, it is possible for the game ball that has won the through gate 35 to win the second operation port 34.

  Based on the winning on the through gate 35, the utility power supply 34a of the second operation port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, and a common drawing display of the drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is an area where the gaming ball does not pass in the gaming area PA The variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electronic combination open winning, the result of the stop corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the common view display unit 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power transmission open state. In the general-purpose open state, the general-purpose utility item 34a is open in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the common view display part 38a is comprised by the segment display which a some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed in the common view display unit 38a, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the common drawing unit 38, a common drawing suspension display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls winning through the through gate 35 is held at a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by lighting of the common drawing hold display unit 38b.

  A lottery is triggered by winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly indicated through display effects in the special display unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

  In detail, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display unit 37 a. The display area of the special view display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special view display unit 37a, the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 is used as a trigger and a lottery is performed, thereby performing variable display of symbols or predetermined display. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special view display part 37a is comprised by the segment display in which several segment light emission parts are arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern displayed on the special view display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  In the special drawing unit 37, a special drawing reservation display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special drawing display unit 37a. The number of game balls played in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by turning on the special view holding display unit 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  In the symbol display device 41, when the special pattern display or the predetermined display is performed on the special view display unit 37a based on the winning on the first operation opening 33 or the winning on the second operation opening 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. Variable display or predetermined display is performed. That is, when the variable display is performed in the special view display unit 37a, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the gaming round when the gaming result is a big hit result, in the symbol display device 41, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on an effective line set in advance.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 4 is a view showing the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine types of main designs, each of which has a numeral "1" to "9", and a shell-shaped picture It is constituted by the sub pattern. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (b), the display surface P is such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine patterns of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. Further, on the display surface P, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lower line L4, and a right upper line L5 are set. Then, the variation display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is finished, the big hit moving picture is displayed as the occurrence of a normal big hit result or 15R probability variation big hit result described later.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "specific symbol" and with the even number (2, 4, 6, 8) The main symbol corresponds to "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot occurs, the combination of the same specific symbol or the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, when a big hit result usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Moreover, when it becomes an explicit 2R probability variation big hit result which will be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed. An explicit movie is displayed.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Also, based on winning on any of the operation openings 33, 34, variable display is started on the special view display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above variable display is stopped. Is equivalent to one game play.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, when the jackpot is won by the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34, winning of the special power winning device 32 becomes possible. Switch to open / close execution mode. The special power winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is disposed in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not be won, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won if the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a hit result is obtained. In the closed state, although it is not impossible to win, it may be in a state in which the winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 configured as described above. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area PA from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the game area PA may be made through the window panel 43 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 If it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided. Moreover, below the window part 42, the upper side bulging part 46 and the lower side bulging part 47 which bulged to the front side are arranged in parallel up and down. An upper plate 46a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a similarly opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper tray 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15, and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 46a.

  On the back side of the inner frame 13, a main control device, an audio light emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power / fire control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 which controls the main control of the game. Incidentally, in the main control unit 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control substrate 51 etc. is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening is provided. You may As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can not be separably joined, and the structure of the joining portion (crimping portion) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion in the case of separation, A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left on is pasted across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 53, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Specifically, NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as random access is possible, the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power / emission control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and emission control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operation power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply / discharge control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, so that the MPU 52 executes processing for power failure. It is possible to

  Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors concerned, detection provided in a one-to-one manner with respect to the winning correspondence entry portion such as general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and through gate 35 A sensor is included, and in the MPU 52, winning determination (filling determination) to each ball entry portion is performed. Further, the MPU 52 executes a big hit occurrence lottery and a big hit result type lottery based on the winning on the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and executes a reach occurrence lottery of each game time and a determination lottery of display duration Do.

  Here, the structure for performing various lottery in MPU52 is demonstrated.

  The MPU 52 uses a variety of counter information to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the special view display unit 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the common view display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the usual jackpot result, the symbol In the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the display device 41 deviates out, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and in the special view display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41 The variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time is used. Furthermore, a common use electric power release counter C4 used in a lottery for determining whether or not the common good type commercial product 34a of the second operation port 34 is to be in the electric power open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to "0". The information corresponding to the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is a hold storage area 54b as acquired information storage means when winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs. Stored in

  The holding storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE includes a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, and the winning history to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 At the same time, each numerical value information of the per-random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  If winnings to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occur in a plurality of consecutive times in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 Each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of the third reserve area RE3 and the fourth reserve area RE4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the game ball's winning history of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. . The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the special view display unit 37a is started, and at the start of one game cycle On the basis of the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a determination of success or failure is made.

  More specifically, for each counter, the per-random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the per-random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random-number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the per-random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a success or failure table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the hit / fall lottery means.

  Under the gaming state where the low probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state where the high-probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is twenty. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening and closing control of the special power winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the lottery means after completion of the opening and closing execution mode, and (3) the third after opening and closing execution mode A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the common use utility 34 a of the 2 operation port 34.

  As an aspect of the open / close control of the special power winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings on the special power winning device 32 in the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 30 seconds elapse or the winning to the special winning opening It is continued until the number becomes 10 pieces. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the large winning opening Is continued until six are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 58 is controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Ru. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one big winning opening is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of opening and closing of the special winning opening in high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode, the open limit time for one opening, and the open limited number for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode Also, as long as the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the special power winning device 32 becomes high between the start of the open / close execution mode and the end, it is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a greater number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, winning of the special power winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It is good to be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the gaming ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, one opening is The product of the firing cycle of the gaming balls and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. Also, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one big winning opening are not the above, it is substantially set by setting the latter to be shorter than the former in the low frequency winning mode. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the special power winning device 32 does not have a winning.

  As a support mode in the commercial electric utility 34 a of the second operating opening 34, the universal electric power of the second operating opening 34 when compared in the situation where the firing of the gaming ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set such that the frequency at which the accessory 34a is open per unit time is relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the open position winning state in the electric combination opening lottery using the common utility combination opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose object 34a is in the open state is selected more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times is set to one more Opening time is set long. In this case, when the open state is elected in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the general purpose utility product 34a occurs a plurality of times, it is from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set to be shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, the high frequency support mode has a shorter time than the low frequency support mode as a securing time that is minimally secured after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed and the next electric combination opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first operation port 33 is higher than that of the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operation port 33. There is a high probability that a winning on the mouth 34 will occur. And, when the winning a prize to the 2nd operation opening 34 occurs, because the payout of the game sphere of specified number is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the game while the player does not decrease the ball very much It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time than in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is also possible to increase the probability of being in the electronic combination open state winning state in. In addition, secure time to be secured when the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed (e.g. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display to be executed are prepared, in the high frequency support mode, it is set so that a short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured upon the next electric combination opening lottery being performed after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed (i.e., shorter) And one of the condition of any combination or any combination of shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability). May enhance the advantage of the frequent support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. Then, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is made when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. . The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pass / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the success or failure lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state.

  Note that the normal gaming state refers to the state where the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, in relation to the above-mentioned respective gaming states.

  In the distribution table, among the values of "0 to 29" jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" usually correspond to the jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result "15-29" correspond to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the aspect of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified by the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result being set as the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation big win results, the advantage for the player is the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode is the highest 15R probability variation jackpot result, opening and closing execution In the support mode, although it becomes the low frequency winning mode in the mode, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result becoming the high frequency support mode becomes the lowest. Thereby, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In addition, as one kind of probability variation big hit result, opening and closing execution mode becomes low frequency winning mode, furthermore, after completion of opening and closing execution mode, as well as acceptance lottery mode becomes high probability mode, support mode is maintained in the mode until then The implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variation jackpot result is achieved.

  Furthermore, as one kind of out result in the success or failure lottery, while transitioning to the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the special out result that transition of the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur after the end may be included. . In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variation big hit result and the special outlier result as described above are set, the open / close execution mode transitions to the low frequency win mode and the support mode remains in the previous mode. While it is common in that it is common that the transition mode of the lottery mode is different, for example, when either an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or an exceptional result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect in the symbol display device 41. Expected effects are provided with the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and the special display of the stop display result after the variable display is performed in the game round when the open / close execution mode of the special power prize device 32 is high frequency prize mode In the gaming machine as a result, the player is made to think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result at a stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is started. It says the display state for.

  Two types of expectation rendering are set up: the above-mentioned reach display, and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of a special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is made by stopping and displaying the symbols for a part of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface P after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  With regard to reach display according to the fluctuation display of the symbol, specifically, the occurrence of the high-frequency pay mode on the preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 as a step before ending the fluctuation display of the symbol A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols which may be a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to a symbol, and the variation display of symbols by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed. To do.

  If the display contents of FIG. 4 are specifically explained, first, in the state where the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row Z1 of the upper row and the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row Z3 of the lower row further, any one is effective A reach line is formed by stopping display of the main symbols with the same number attached to the lines L1 to L5, and the variation display of symbols is performed in the middle row of the symbol row Z2 in a situation where the reach line is formed. It becomes a reach indication by being treated. Then, when the high frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is ended.

  In the advance notice display, after variation display of symbols is started on display surface P of symbol display device 41, in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, the background image may be a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, or the pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time to shift to the open / close execution mode. In addition, in game times which are not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to in response to the occurrence of reach display with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Will be executed if On the other hand, the main control unit 50 does not determine whether to display the advance notice, but the sound emission control unit 60 does.

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the fluctuation display time in the special view display unit 37 a and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the special view display unit 37a and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of the fluctuation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. Note that when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  For example, the common utility battery release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The routine power release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the power hold area 54c at the timing when the game ball is won in the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the general-purpose utility 34a is controlled to an open state by the value of the stored general-purpose utility open counter C4.

  The payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the power / emission control device 57 is connected. The payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the result of the winning determination on the winning combination ball entry unit. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 50. A release permission command is transmitted to the power and emission control device 57 based on the fact that the emission control device 28 is operated. Based on the release permission command received from the main control device 50, the power / emission control device 57 drives the game ball emission mechanism 58 to cause the game balls to be emitted toward the game area.

  A special view display unit 37a and a common view display unit 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, the display control of the special view display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52 at each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not the common utility product 34a is to be in the open state is specified, the display control of the common drawing display unit 38a is executed in the MPU 52.

  The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a special electric prize drive unit for opening and closing the open / close door of the special electric award winning device 32, and a general electric utility drive unit for opening and closing the ordinary electric utility 34a of the second operation port 34. . That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the special electric wire winning driving unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the common utility player 34a is won, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the common utility product drive unit so that the common utility product 34a is opened and closed. Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and transmits various commands for effect to the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, the process executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processes of the MPU 52 are roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in the present embodiment).

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, power on wait processing is performed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power on wait process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / emission control device 57 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, the power failure flag of the RAM 54 is set to "1". Determine if In step S106, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum. In the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of stored data. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the start of business operation of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. In addition, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the process of step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the process in step S108 is not performed under the condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Go to In step S109, power on setting processing is performed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 to recognize the current gaming state. Do.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S110 to step S113. That is, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S110 to step S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S110 to the step S113 is a non-periodic process which is executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable setting is performed. In the following step S111, the random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the RAM 54, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state where the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where it is permitted. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power supply interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of the power failure is specified, the power failure processing is executed.

  In the subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the random number updating process for drawing, the update of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general purpose battery release counter C4 is executed. Specifically, the present numerical value information was sequentially read out from the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the process of adding one each of the read numerical information was executed. Later, the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S112.

  In the subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of plural types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to the flag for game suspension provided in the RAM 54.

  In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set to the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, processing in step S207 and subsequent steps is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to various driving units is executed. For example, the output of the drive signal to the special electric wire prize drive unit is started when the information to switch the electric special prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, and the information is to be changed when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stop output of drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the common use utility 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the common use commons drive unit is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In the following step S208, a reading process is performed. In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In the subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the prize detection process, the signals received from the respective prize detection sensors are read, and the presence or absence of prizes in the general prize port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the through gate 35 Execute processing to identify

  In the subsequent step S210, a timer update process is performed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54. In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  In the following step S211, a launch control process is performed to control the launch of the gaming ball. In the situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, as described above, one gaming ball is launched in 0.6 sec which is a predetermined launch cycle.

  In the subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, confirmation of disconnection of each winning detection sensor and confirmation of opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208.

  In the following step S213, special figure special power control processing for executing execution control of the game times and execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the special figure special power control process, when the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 has a prize, the number of the suspension information stored in the suspension storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing each numerical value information of the per-random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point as the hold information in time series in the hold storage area 54b is executed. Further, in the special view special power control process, on the condition that the game is not running or in the opening / closing execution mode and the holding information is stored, it is determined whether the holding information corresponds to a big hit or not. If it corresponds to processing and jackpot winning, distribution determination processing is executed to determine which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to. Further, in the special view special power control process, in addition to the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, it is determined whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence. While performing the reach determination process to determine, the process which selects the continuation time of a game time using the numerical information of the fluctuation | variation type | mold counter CS in that time is performed. In this case, the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the presence of jackpot win, jackpot type and reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and the read fluctuation display time table and the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that timing Determine the duration of the game play. And while transmitting the command for change including the information of the continuation time of the determined game times and the type command including information on the game result to the voice light emission control device 60, the fluctuation display of the pattern in the special view display portion 37a To start. As a result, one game cycle is started, and the special game display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 start producing effects for the game cycle.

  Also, in the special view special power control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game turn during execution of one game turn, and in the state where the display corresponding to the game result is performed in the end timing. , Execute processing to end the game times. In this case, a final stop command indicating that the game play should be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. Further, in the special view special power control process, when the result of the game play is a result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 60. Further, in the special view special power control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. At the time of each processing, an open command indicating that a round game is to be started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command indicating that the round game is to be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special power control process, when ending the open / close execution mode, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 and for setting the pass / fail lottery mode or the support mode after the open / close execution mode. Execute the process

  After the special figure special power control process of step S213 is executed in the timer interrupt process, the general view general power control process is executed in step S214. When the winning gate on the through gate 35 has been awarded, the routine control routine executes processing for acquiring the hold information on the general view side, and the hold information on the general view side is stored. Then, the release determination is performed on the hold information, and the release determination is used as a trigger to execute processing for producing effects for the common drawing. Also, based on the result of the open determination, processing is performed to open and close the general purpose utility product 34 a of the second operation port 34.

  In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information concerning the special view display unit 37a on the special view hold display unit 37b is performed. The output information is set to reflect the increase / decrease number of the suspension information related to the common drawing display unit 38a on the common drawing reservation display unit 38b. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of the previous step S213 and step S214, setting of output information for updating the display content of the special view display unit 37a is performed, and the display content of the common view display unit 38a is set. Set the output information for updating.

  In the subsequent step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is performed to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. Thereafter, this timer interrupt processing is ended.

<Speech emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the voice emission control device 60 includes a voice emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 63, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Specifically, NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as random access is possible, the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control unit 50 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Further, a display CPU 72 described later of the display control device 70 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the MPU 62. That is, the MPU 62 is connected to the display CPU 72 so as to be capable of bi-directional communication, and commands are exchanged between the MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 by bi-directional communication. Although the two-way communication is performed by serial communication, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed by parallel communication.

  By receiving the fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 50, the MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start an effect for game circulation, and executes a game circulation effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effects for the game use, and the effect for ending the game use is executed. Also, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to start the jackpot effect or it is necessary to proceed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed.

  Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

  In the game use effect start process, the process of grasping the fluctuation display time for grasping the fluctuation display time of the corresponding game time and the reach display grasping process of grasping the presence or absence of the reach display based on both commands of fluctuation command and type command And, the grasping process of the jackpot result occurrence which grasps the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the grasping process of the jackpot type which grasps the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasped result in reach display grasping process, jackpot result occurrence grasping process and jackpot type grasping process, a symbol for determining the type of symbol to be displayed on display surface P of symbol display device 41 in the final game round Execute type identification processing. Then, based on the result of each grasping process, the display control device, the fluctuation pattern command including the information of fluctuation display time and the information of the type of display effect, and the symbol designation command including the information of the type of symbol to be displayed in the final stop Send to 70

  Further, in the game-use effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process as to whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the advance notice is also executed. Then, if it is determined that the advance notice display has been generated, a notice command including information on the notice display type is transmitted to the display control device 70.

  In addition, in the game circulation effect start process, the display light emission table for the game circulation and the voice table for the game circulation are read out from the ROM 63 based on the processing result of each of the above processes. The light emission aspect of the display light emission part 44 in the advancing process of applicable game times is prescribed | regulated by the display light emission table for game times. In addition, an output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progressing process of the corresponding game number is defined by the sound table for the game number.

  In the game turn effect end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game turn are ended. In addition, in the game circulation effect end process, an end command including information to be ended of the game circulation effect is transmitted to the display control device 70.

  In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for jackpot effect, it grasps the effect mode such as opening time, each round time, each round time, each round time and ending time, and for the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped result Command is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the big hit effect and the voice table for the big hit effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 during the big hit effect To define.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads out, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to the input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, but includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Be

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74 and the VRAM 75 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on a command received from the audio light emission control device 60, performs a drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described below.

  The memory module 74 stores control data including control programs and fixed value data in advance, and also includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, moving image data, and the like. It is a storage unit that stores various image data in advance. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory which does not require an external power supply for storing data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-write and read only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape and pattern of the character, and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which the still image data is compressed. Moving image data will be described in detail later.

  The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory which requires an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 73 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. The VRAM 75 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 76 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to one another via a bus, and also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  In the VDP 76, the drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 is stored in the register 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 activates a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. Note that all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the control program and the contents of the drawing list The controller 91 may be configured to execute a predetermined process based on the above. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the above process, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data of one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or processing) the image data read out to the expansion buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame means data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of the frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data of one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The present invention is not limited to the full color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b in the frame buffer 82, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

  In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 94. It is outputted to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 78. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 82 a and 82 b to be output to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by performing resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. Also, the moving picture decoder 93 decodes the moving picture data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 62 of Audio Emission Control Device 60>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 62 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side MPU 62) of the sound emission control device 60 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing repeatedly executed by the sound light side MPU 62 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  First, in step S301, main-side command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 (hereinafter, referred to as the main-side MPU 52) of the main control apparatus 50 is executed. In the subsequent step S302, a command selection process is performed to instruct the display CPU 72 the content of display control of the symbol display device 41.

  Thereafter, in step S303, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control pattern table read out in the main-side command corresponding process of step S301. Further, in step S304, sound output control processing for performing sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed in accordance with the control pattern table read in the main-side command corresponding process of step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current control pattern table is updated to the next pointer information. In step S306, display side command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the command received from the display CPU 72 is executed.

<Main side command corresponding process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main-side command handling processing executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

  When the variable command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a storage process of the game result is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the information on which is the result of the acceptance lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game run is specified, and The identified information is written to the RAM 64.

  In the subsequent step S403, a notice lottery process is executed. In the advance lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the advance notice display is to be performed by the symbol display device 41 in the current game run. As the advance notice display, as described above, after variation display of symbols is started on the symbol display device 41, in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable pattern row in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is displayed so far These include those having a different predetermined aspect and those having a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as a predetermined aspect different from the previous aspects. The advance notice may occur at any of the game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but it is higher when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the big hit results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the out result, and a notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. Make a advance notice lottery.

  In the subsequent step S404, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is either the big hit result or the 15R probability variation big hit result, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbol is established on one valid line L1 to L5 The determined information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can usually be selected in either the large jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result. In addition, the effective lines L1-L5 in which the combination of the same symbol is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the same combination of odd symbols may be selected even if it is usually a jackpot result.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is an explicit 2R probability variation big hit result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the valid lines L1 to L5, and one valid line L1. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination ("3.4.1") of a specific symbol combination is established on ~ L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is an out result, the presence or absence of the reach display is specified from the content of the change command. And when reach indication occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbol are not materialized on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one or two on the effective lines L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the present stop result. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbol are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and reach on all the effective lines L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the present stop result.

  In the following step S405, processing for determining an effect pattern of the current game run is executed. In the processing, while specifying the information of the continuation time of the game times from the content of the command for fluctuation received this time, the information of the continuation time, the information of the game result specified in the above step S402, the notice in the above step S403 The effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the lottery result of the lottery process and the information of the stop result determined in step S404 is selected. When selecting this effect pattern, the pattern determination table provided in the ROM 63 is referred to, and the information of the current duration, the information of the game result, the information of the lottery result of the advance lottery process, and the stop result An address in the ROM 63 of the control pattern table corresponding to the information is specified, and the control pattern table is read out from the ROM 63 and written in the RAM 64 based on the specified result of the address.

  The control pattern table will be more specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of a control pattern table that can be selected when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the control pattern table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the duration of the target game is set, and the task information is made to correspond to each pointer information, Information of presence / absence of command output and information of additional data are set.

  Information on task content is information set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game run, and information not to reflect information on the task content is not set as additional data As long as the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed in each frame in a mode according to the information of the content of the task, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed.

  Specifically, in the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information of "0", and data at the start of the notice effect start is set in the pointer information of "200", Data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and at the time of start of super reach in the pointer information of "700" Data is set, data at the start of the fixed effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and data at the end of the change is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each piece of pointer information corresponds to a break timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In addition, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between division timings is set in pointer information other than these.

  The information on the presence or absence of the command output is information indicating the presence or absence of the output of the command from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting a command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table, it is possible to associate the content of the image in the symbol display device 41, the light emission content in the display light emitting unit 44, and the sound output content in the speaker unit 45 . That is, in accordance with the contents of the moving image in the symbol display device 41, the effect of light is executed by the display light emitting unit 44, and the effect of sound output is executed by the speaker unit 45.

  Specifically, in the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, command data is set to pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of fluctuation is set in the contents of the task. Therefore, at the start of variation of the game time, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. In addition, in the contents of the task, each pointer information for which data at the time of start of the notice effect start, data at the time of start of normal reach, data at the start of super reach, data at the start of fixed effect start and data at the end of fluctuation Specifically, command data is set for each piece of pointer information of “200”, “400”, “700”, “1000”, and “1400”. Therefore, within the range of the effects of the game circulation started by the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger that the variable side command and the type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 52, of the effect classification included in the effect of the game circulation When the type changes, display control corresponding to the new effect classification is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

  The information of the additional data is set as blank as the initial setting of the control pattern table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when an instruction to execute the notification is given. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written to the additional data is prioritized over the information originally set to the content of the task. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as notification, an image is displayed such that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. Ru.

  In addition, the control pattern table is provided to correspond to the effect in the situation where neither the effect for the open / close execution mode nor the effect for the game effect or the effect for the open / close execution mode is performed in addition to the effect for the game It is done. Since the control pattern table is set corresponding to various situations as described above, in a situation where the operation power is supplied to the sound light side MPU 62, some control pattern table is read out to the RAM 64. There is.

  Returning to the explanation of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 10), in step S406, it is determined whether a notification execution command has been received from the main MPU 52 or not. When the notification execution command is specified that the predetermined event set as the monitoring target for fraud has occurred in the fraud detection process of step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52 And when the game machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is specified to be open in the input state monitoring process of step S212. Since the notification execution command includes data corresponding to the content of the notification target, the sound-light side MPU 62 can specify the content of the notification target from the received notification execution command.

  When the notification execution command is received (step S406: YES), the setting process for the notification start is executed (step S407). In the setting process for start of notification, data for executing notification corresponding to the current notification execution command is set as additional data after the current pointer information in the control pattern table currently set. For example, when the notification execution command corresponding to the detection of the fraud is received, the data for performing the fraud notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is set as the additional data. Further, when a notification execution command corresponding to a change in the state of the pachinko machine 10 such as opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is received, data for performing state notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is added data Set as. As a result, the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 execute the unauthorized notification or the status notification. When the control pattern table to be executed is changed after the notification execution command is received and before the notification cancellation command is received, the additional data of the control pattern table newly changed is received. The notification data having the same content as the content set in the additional data of the control pattern table immediately before is set. This makes it possible to continue the execution of the notification.

  Thereafter, in step S408, a notification execution command corresponding to the content of the notification execution command received this time is transmitted to the display CPU 72. Thereby, display control is executed by the display CPU 72 so that the notification image corresponding to the notification execution command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In step S409, it is determined whether a notification cancellation command has been received from the main MPU 52 or not. The notification cancellation command is output when it is specified that the state in which the predetermined event has occurred has been canceled in the fraud detection processing of step S205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52. This is also output when it is specified that the gaming machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is closed from the opened state in the input state monitoring process of step S212.

  When the notification cancellation command is received (step S409: YES), the setting processing for notification cancellation is executed (step S410). In the setting process for canceling the notification, the additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table is cleared to “0”. As a result, the informing notification or the status notification performed by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is cancelled. Thereafter, in step S411, a notification cancellation command is transmitted to the display CPU 72. Thereby, the display of the notification image in the symbol display device 41 is ended.

  In the main-side command handling process, other handling processes are executed in step S412 in addition to the above processes. In the other response processing, for example, when the final stop command is received from the main MPU 52, processing for ending the effects for the game circulation is executed. Also, the control pattern table for executing effects for the opening / closing execution mode is read when the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, and for the opening / closing execution mode when the ending command is received from the main MPU 52. Execute processing to end the effect of. In addition, in a situation where neither of the effects for the game run and the effects for the open / close execution mode are executed, the control pattern table for executing the effect during standby is read out.

<Command selection process>
Next, the command selection process executed in step S302 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. Prior to the description of the command selection process, the contents of the command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the command.

  The command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 has a data configuration of multiple bytes. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, it has first command data CD1, second command data CD2, and third command data CD3. The first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 have the same number of bytes, and specifically, each have 1 byte. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the command data CD1 to CD3 may have a plurality of bytes.

  In each of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3, the upper 2 bits have a function as an identification bit, and the remaining 6 bits have a function as a data bit. In the identification bit, data indicating which one of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 the command data of itself is set is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12A, "01" is set in the identification bit of the first command data CD1, and in FIG. 12B, the identification bit of the second command data CD2 is set. As shown in FIG. 12, "10" is set, and "11" is set in the identification bit of the third command data CD3 as shown in FIG. 12 (c).

  Data corresponding to the instruction content from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is set in the data bit. In the data bit of the first command data CD1, data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the first type as the content of the large frame in the instruction content is set. Specifically, if it is a command instructing execution of the effect, data of the effect for the game run, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and data of the type of effect to be executed in the waiting effect are set, and the notification is executed If it is a command that instructs the command, data indicating which of the fraud notification and the status notification is the execution target is set.

  Data for setting the type of the second type included in the type of the first type specified by the first command data CD1 is set in the data bit of the second command data CD2. Further, data for setting the type of the third type included in the type of the second type specified by the second command data CD2 is set in the data bit of the third command data CD3.

  With reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG. 13, taking as an example a command instructing execution of an effect, it will be described what contents are instructed by the respective command data CD1 to CD3.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the advance notice may be generated as an effect for the game circulation. The advance notice display is a state in which symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, or a part of the symbol rows is variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows It is an effect to be performed in the situation, and it is easier for the notice display to occur than when the reach display is not performed, and the game times corresponding to the big hit result is more for the game times corresponding to the result Notice display is more likely to occur compared to. A plurality of types of advance notices are set. Step-up notices and talk notices are set as a part of the notices.

  The step-up notice is an effect to be executed step by step, and the reach display is performed by the combination of the number of steps to be executed, the display color of the character displayed when the effect is executed, and the type of notice character to be displayed. The expected degree of expectation and the degree of expectation that the jackpot result will occur are suggested. Also, the conversation announcement is an effect that a display is performed such that a conversation is being performed between the first announcement character and the second announcement character, the content of the conversation to be executed, the display color of the character of the conversation, The combination of the types of the first preview character and the second preview character to be displayed suggests the degree to which the reach display is performed and the degree to which the jackpot result is generated.

  If the first command data CD1 is "41" when represented in hexadecimal, it corresponds to a step-up notice. In the case of the step-up notice, it is instructed by the second command data CD2 which of the number of steps, the character color and the notice character is the instruction target, and is instructed by the second command data CD2 by the third command data CD3. The specific content of the instruction target is indicated. In this case, the content instructed by one type of command is only one type of content of the plurality of types of second types included in the step-up notice. That is, when executing step-up notice, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 on the number of stages, the character color, and the type of the notice character, but depending on one type of command, only the content of one type of second type Will be instructed. Therefore, when instructing execution of the step-up notice, it is necessary to transmit the command including the command data CD1 to CD3 for the type of the content of the second type, specifically, three types. The sound-light side MPU 62 transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 when the transmission of the three types of commands is completed to instruct the execution of the step-up notice. The end command has a data configuration that is not used in other commands. Specifically, it is "FF" in hexadecimal. When the display CPU 72 receives the end command, the display CPU 72 specifies that the transmission of the command group targeted for the current instruction is completed. Thereby, even if a command consisting of the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 is transmitted in order to instruct execution of the step notice, it is displayed that all of the commands have been received. It becomes possible for CPU 72 to clearly grasp.

  In the case where the first command data CD1 is represented by a hexadecimal number and is "42", it corresponds to the conversation announcement. In the case of conversation announcement, the second command data CD2 indicates which of the contents of the conversation, the character color, the first announcement character and the second announcement character are to be indicated, and the third command data CD3 indicates the second command. The specific content of the instruction target indicated by the data CD2 is indicated. In this case, as in the case of the step-up notice, the contents instructed by one type of command are only one of the contents of the second type of the plurality of types included in the conversation notice as in the case of the step-up notice. That is, in the case of executing a conversational announcement, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 on the contents of the conversation, the character color, and the types of the first and second preliminary announcement characters, but depending on one kind of command, one kind Only the content of the second type of is indicated. Therefore, in order to instruct execution of conversational annunciation, it is necessary to transmit a command including command data CD1 to CD3 for the type of content of the second type, specifically, four types. When the sound-side MPU 62 completes the transmission of the four types of commands to instruct the execution of the conversation notice, it transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 as in the case of the step-up notice. Thereby, even if the command including the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 is transmitted in order to instruct execution of conversation annunciation, it is displayed that all the reception of the command has been completed. It becomes possible for CPU 72 to clearly grasp. In addition, even if the total number of commands transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 is different between the step-up notice and the conversation notice, the end command is transmitted when all transmissions of the command corresponding to each effect are completed. Then, the display CPU 72 can clearly grasp that all the reception of the command corresponding to each effect has been completed.

  In addition, in order to indicate the content of a plurality of types of the second type also when instructing the execution of other effects, when transmitting a command instructing the execution of a predetermined effect, a plurality of types of commands are transmitted, and these commands are transmitted When the command is completed, an end command is sent. In addition, although there is also an effect in which the content of the second type is only one type, when instructing execution of such an effect, one type of command including each command data CD1 to CD3 is transmitted and the transmission is completed. Sends an end command if it does. Further, the sound light side MPU 62 finally transmits an end command also when transmitting a command for execution instruction of notification as well as a command for execution instruction of effect. Thereby, the display CPU 72 can grasp whether or not the reception of the command from the sound light side MPU 62 for giving a predetermined instruction is completed, by whether or not the end command is received.

  When the sound-light MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute the contents of the advance notice to be executed in the predetermined period, the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are made to correspond to the contents of the second step included in the advance notice. A plurality of types of commands are sent. As a result, even when the number of types in the second stage is increased or decreased, or even when the contents of the second stage are changed, the command may be changed in the corresponding second stage unit. It can be facilitated.

  In addition, even if one command is rewritten during transmission due to the influence of noise or the like by transmitting a plurality of types of commands in such a configuration that one-to-one correspondence is made to the contents of the second type in this way, data is rewritten. , It is possible to keep the influence on the content of one type of second type.

  Even in the case where the content instructed from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is diversified by having a configuration in which the instruction content is determined stepwise by a plurality of command data CD1 to CD3, the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 The design of commands can be facilitated.

  Further, data used as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation notice, similarly, The data used as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation notice. The data used as the command data CD1 to CD3 are stored in advance in the ROM 63, but as described above, the data used as the second command data CD2 and the data used as the third command data CD3 are With the configuration commonly used for a plurality of types of commands, it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing data for commands in the ROM 63.

  The command selection process executed by the sound light side MPU 62 to transmit the command will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the data indicating the transmission timing of the command to the display CPU 72 is set in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table (step S501: YES), the command at the current transmission timing from the control pattern table The number of types is read, and a value corresponding to the number of types is set in a command type number counter provided in the RAM 64 (step S502). Thereafter, the address data of the command area of the ROM 63 specified in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table, which corresponds to the value of the current command type number counter, is specified. Then, according to the specified address data, the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 are read out from the ROM 63 (steps S503 to S505), and the read command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted as commands. It sets to the ring buffer provided in RAM64 as an area for object (step S506). The sound light side MPU 62 sequentially reads out the commands set in the ring buffer and transmits it to the display CPU 72 in the transmission interruption process periodically (for example, 1 msec) activated separately from the timer interruption process (FIG. 9). In this case, the commands set in the ring buffer are transmitted in order of earlier timing.

  Thereafter, the value of the command type number counter is decremented by 1 (step S507), and it is determined whether the value of the command type number counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S508). If not “0”, the processing of step S503 to step S506 is executed for the command corresponding to the value of the updated command type number counter. If it is "0", the end command is read from the ROM 63 and set in the ring buffer in step S509.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 at a predetermined cycle, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec.

  When the VDP 76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dots at the upper left corner of the display surface P, and on the horizontal line including the dots at one end An image signal is sequentially output to the arranged dots, and an image signal is output from left to right dots in order from the top to each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs the V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt process can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was activated, the V interrupt process is newly activated.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, in step S601, command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16A, in step S701, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the sound light side MPU 62 or not. When the display CPU 72 receives a strobe signal from the sound side MPU 62, it activates the command interrupt process with the highest priority regardless of the process being executed at that time, and the command received at the input port 77 is received. , And stored in the command storage buffer 101 provided in the work RAM 73.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 16B, the command storage buffer 101 is provided with a first unprocessed area 102, a second unprocessed area 103, and a third unprocessed area 104. Each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 includes five command storage areas 102 a to 102 e, 103 a to 103 e, and 104 a to 104 e. Each of the command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e can store one type of command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3. Has a 3-byte data structure. In addition, the number of command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e provided in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 corresponds to one execution instruction of effect execution or execution instruction of notification from the sound light side MPU 62. It is more than the maximum number of types of command sent when it is detected. As a result, it is possible to store a command group that is transmitted when one execution instruction is performed in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 and a command group that is transmitted when one notification instruction is issued. Further, the number of unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is equal to or more than the maximum number of command groups that can wait in the unprocessed state in the display CPU 72. As a result, in a configuration in which an unprocessed command group can stand by, it is possible to prevent execution omission of processing corresponding to the command group.

  In the command interrupt process, when an end command is received last time and a new command is received, if an unprocessed command group is not stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the first unprocessed area 102. Is stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the second unprocessed area 103, and the unprocessed commands are stored in the second unprocessed area 103. If it is stored, the command is stored in the third unprocessed area 104. Then, each time a command is received, the command storage process is sequentially executed on the command storage area of the unprocessed area as the storage target until the end command is received. When the end command is received, the unprocessed area for storing the command is set as the area of the next order. In the command interrupt process, when a process for storing a command is executed, it is possible to specify which command storage area 102a-102e, 103a-103e, 104a-104e in the unprocessed area 102-104. Make data settings to

  Returning to the description of the command analysis process (FIG. 16A), in step S701, it is determined whether or not storage of a command in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is newly started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 701, “1” is set in the in-reception flag provided in the work RAM 73 in order to specify with the display CPU 72 whether or not the command group is being received. If the process of step S702 has been executed, or if the "receiving" flag is set to "1" (step S703: YES), it is determined in step S704 whether an end command has been received. When the end command is received (step S704: YES), the value of the unprocessed counter provided in the work RAM 73 is incremented by 1 (step S705), and the receiving flag is cleared to "0" (step S706).

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), after executing the command analysis process in step S601, the condition that the value of the unprocessed counter in the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S602: YES), The command corresponding process is executed in S603, and the value of the unprocessed counter is decremented by 1 in step S604. The command handling process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, read processing of a command to be processed this time is executed (step S801). Specifically, the command stored in the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101 of the work RAM 73 is written in the area for the processing target command of the work RAM 73. When the writing is executed, each data in the second unprocessed area 103 is overwritten on the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101, and then each data in the third unprocessed area 104 is not secondly processed. The processing area 103 is overwritten.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to the number of command types to be processed this time is set in the process target counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S802). Thereafter, the reference table corresponding to the first command data CD1 in the command to be processed this time is read out from the memory module 74 (step S803). The reference table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the data contents of the first command data CD1 and specifies a display pattern table for executing the image display corresponding to the command to be processed by the symbol display device 41. Data for setting is set.

  The reference table RT in the case where data corresponding to the step-up notice is set in the first command data CD1 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the reference table RT, the address of the execution target table is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the combinations of all the third type types that can occur for all the second type types in the step-up notice. For example, when the type of the second type is "number of stages", the type of the third type is "2" and the type of the second type is "character color". The type of the third type is "red." If the type of the second type is the "notice character" and the type of the third type is the "24th character", the address of the second stage red 24 table in the reference table RT is the execution target table. It is set as an address.

  The execution target table displays an image of one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying a moving image corresponding to one transmission of a command group from the sound light side MPU 62 on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 It is a set of information that defines the processing required to make it happen. In the execution target table, pointer information for the number of update timings included in the display period of the moving image by the execution target table is set, and the update timing corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to each pointer information The data for enabling the display of the image in is set.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 17), after the reference table is read out in step S803, the value of the current processing target counter among the commands written in the area of the processing target command of work RAM 73 in step S801 Is read out, and the data corresponding to the combination of the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 in the command is written in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S804). The value of the processing target counter has a one-to-one correspondence with the command storage areas 102a to 102e of the first unprocessed area 102, and in step S804, the processing target is processed from the command storage area corresponding to the current processing target counter value. The command written in the area for command is the target of reading the data.

  After the process of step S804, the value of the process target counter is decremented by 1 in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether the value of the processing target counter after the one subtraction is "0". If not “0”, the processing of step S804 is executed for the command corresponding to the value of the processing target counter after the update. If it is "0", the process of reading the execution target table is executed in step S807. In the read process, the address of the execution target table corresponding to the data read to the register of the display CPU 72 in step S804 is specified from the reference table read in step S803, and the area of the specified address in the memory module 74 is specified. The stored execution target table is read out to the work RAM 73. Thereby, reading of the execution target table corresponding to the command to be processed is completed, and it becomes possible to display the moving image corresponding to the command to be processed on the symbol display device 41.

  By the way, in the situation where the display control based on the execution target table for executing the effects such as the effects for the game run, the effects for the opening / closing execution mode, and the standby effects is executed, the execution for executing the informing notification or the status notification When the target table is read out, the execution target table for notification is read out to the work RAM 73 while storing and holding in the work RAM 73 the execution target table for effect that has already been read out. Then, in task processing described later (FIG. 19), arithmetic processing is enabled that enables display of images corresponding to both of the execution target tables, and in pointer update processing described later (step S607), each pointer of those execution target tables Update information.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), in the command corresponding process of step S603, when an execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is newly set (step S605: YES), or for fraud notification Or, even if the execution target table for state notification is not newly set (step S605: NO), even if “1” is set in the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73 (step S606: YES In step S 607, pointer update processing is performed, and the operation completion flag is cleared to “0”. In the pointer update process, pointer information of the current execution target table is updated to pointer information corresponding to the next update timing. In step S 607 immediately after the execution target table is newly set in the command corresponding process (step S 603), the pointer information update process is performed so as to be pointer information corresponding to the first update timing. The calculation completion flag is a flag for specifying on the display CPU 72 whether or not various kinds of calculation processing for displaying an image corresponding to one update timing has been completed in the previous processing execution cycle of the V interrupt processing. is there.

  After the process of step S607, the task process is performed in step S608. In task processing, in order to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 76 is performed. Specifically, drawing is performed using the address information of the area in which the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74, the address information of the area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75, and the image data of the control Information on the frame areas 82a and 82b for which data is to be created, information on coordinates when writing image data to be controlled in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, information on scale when writing the image data, and the information Information of uniform α value (semi-transparent value) at the time of writing image data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S609, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing according to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task processing is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task processing is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to the drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

  The task processing of step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S901, it is determined whether "1" is set in the in-delay flag provided in the work RAM 73 or not. In task processing, various calculation processes such as background calculation process, effect calculation process, and symbol calculation process are executed as described in detail later. In this case, the period required to execute various arithmetic processing varies depending on the number of individual images to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the type of individual image, and the display mode of the individual image. Then, as a result of the fluctuation of the period, it may occur that the timing to start the next processing round of the V interrupt processing may be reached until the execution of all the arithmetic processing is completed in the task processing. In this case, when waiting for the execution of the V interrupt processing, the display CPU 72 can not promptly cope with the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62. Therefore, when it is time to start the next processing cycle of V interrupt processing during execution of task processing, the configuration is such that new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started instead of continuing task processing as it is It has become. However, when a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started, the calculation result of task processing at that time is stored and held, and in the task processing of V interrupt processing of the new processing cycle, calculation processing is performed from the middle of the calculation. By resuming, the arithmetic processing for one update timing is prevented from being left unexecuted. As a result, for example, in a configuration in which updating of parameters for displaying a predetermined individual image is controlled by the difference from the previous updating value, updating of parameters is skipped once, and subsequent updating of parameters can not be accurately performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences. The in-delay flag is a flag for specifying the display CPU 72 as to whether or not execution of various arithmetic processing in task processing is temporarily interrupted and delayed as described above. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as graphic sprite data.

  If "1" is not set in the under-delay flag (step S901: NO), the control start setting process is executed (step S902). In the setting process for control start, first, based on the execution target table currently set, it is determined whether there is an individual image to be controlled start in the current processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 73 searches an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in order to control the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one to the individual image grasped as the control start target Reserve free buffer space to Furthermore, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameter information for control start according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  In the following step S903, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed, and is an individual image that may be included in an image of one frame after the current processing cycle.

  Thereafter, a new start of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S904, and a new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S905, and a background calculation process is executed (step S906). In the background operation processing, the control update target of this time is grasped among the still image and the sprite for background which are to constitute the background image. In addition, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data specification and the like are calculated and derived for the control update object grasped. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  After that, in step S 907, a new start of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in the subsequent step S 908, a new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then an effect calculation process is executed (step S 909). In the effect calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the effect sprites that constitute the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the control update target grasped. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  After that, in step S910, a new start of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in the subsequent step S911, a new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then symbol operation processing is executed (step S912). In the symbol calculation processing, among the symbols to be subjected to variable display in each game run, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the control update target grasped. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  Incidentally, in each of the calculation processes of step S906, step S909 and step S912, animation data set so as to change in accordance with a specific pattern each time various parameter information of the individual image comes to the image update timing is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. Further, in the symbol arithmetic processing, when the execution target table for informing the fraud or the state notification is read out to the work RAM 73, the arithmetic processing for displaying a notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information to be applied to the notification sprite are derived.

  Thereafter, at step S913, "1" is set in the operation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73. The calculation completion flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify that the background calculation process in step S906, the effect calculation process in step S909, and the symbol calculation process in step S912 have been performed once each.

  Thereafter, in step S914, processing for grasping the drawing instruction target is executed. In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, among the individual images that have been subjected to the control update target by the calculation processes of the above steps S906, S909 and S912, they are included in the image corresponding to one frame of the drawing data creation instruction Execute processing to grasp the individual image to be The said grasping | ascertainment is performed by performing a predetermined calculation with reference to the coordinate of various individual images, the rotation angle, and the information of a scale. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. Thus, it is necessary to sort individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by setting only individual images to be displayed, instead of using the individual images specified in the drawing list as all individual images for which control has been started. Also, even if it is not sorted, there is no need to perform unnecessary drawing processing on individual images that are not to be displayed. Thereby, the processing load of VDP 76 can be reduced.

  Here, when a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is started, the new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited, but the background operation process of step S906, the effect operation process of step S909 And, at each timing before the symbol operation process of step S912 is executed, new start of the V interrupt process is permitted (step S904, step S907 and step S910). As a result, when step S904, step S907 or step S910 is executed and it is the start timing of a new processing of the V interrupt processing, that is, 20 msec has already elapsed since the current V interrupt processing was started. If it is, the task processing is interrupted at that time, and a new processing of the V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the period during which the start of a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is awaited despite the start timing of the new processing cycle of V interrupt processing.

  However, even when a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started as described above, data corresponding to the processing result up to that point in the current task processing is stored and held as it is. Further, in this case, address data corresponding to the process being executed immediately before the start of a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is written in the interruption time address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the interruption time address area 111 is referred to at the start of the task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing cycle, and the execution of the processing is resumed from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It is possible to

  When new start of the V interrupt process is permitted in steps S904, S907 and S910, the background start processing in step S906 is performed after the new start is prohibited in steps S905, S908 and S911. The effect calculation process of step S909 and the symbol calculation process of step S912 are executed. This makes it possible to prevent the start of a new process of the V interrupt process during execution of various arithmetic processes. If a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started during execution of various arithmetic processing, it is assumed that the data amount of data in the middle of operation to be stored and held becomes extremely large, and further, a new V interrupt processing is newly generated. The contents of the address data in the case of returning to the state in the middle of the computation in the processing cycle may be complicated. On the other hand, the new start of the V interrupt process is inhibited before the various operation processes are started, so that the new process cycle of the V interrupt process is not started during the various operation processes. It becomes possible.

  If a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process is started during execution of the task process, the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) is performed without executing the process of setting “1” to the operation completion flag in step S913. The process of step S601 of will be started. Then, it is determined in step S606 that the operation completion flag is not set to "1". In this case, "1" is set in the in-delay flag of the work RAM 73 in step S610.

  If the in-delay flag is set to “1”, in the subsequent task processing (FIG. 19), an affirmative determination is made in step S901. In this case, after clearing the in-delay flag to "0" (step S915), by reading the address data from the interruption address area 111 of the work RAM 73, the new processing of V interrupt processing starts in the previous task processing. The process jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before the start (step S916). This makes it possible to resume the execution of the process from the timing at which the interruption occurred in the previous task process.

  In the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), when a negative determination is made in step S606, a delay command is further transmitted to the sound side MPU 62 (step S611). The delay command includes data of pointer information in the current execution target table. The processing when the delay command is received by the sound light side MPU 62 is executed in the display side command corresponding process of step S306 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, when the delay command is received (step S1001: YES), pointer information of the execution target table is read out from the delay command received this time (step S1002). Thereafter, based on the pointer information of the control pattern table read out to the RAM 64 of the audio light emission control device 60 and the pointer information read out from the delay command, the display CPU 72 corresponds to the occurrence of the update timing delay. The pointer range for the delay is calculated (step S1003).

  Since the output timing of the command to the display CPU 72 is set in the control pattern table, it is possible to derive the pointer information of the timing when the execution instruction of the effect corresponding to the current execution target table in the display CPU 72 is issued. is there. Also, although the cycle in which the pointer information in the control pattern table is updated in the sound light side MPU 62 and the cycle in which the pointer information in the execution target table is updated in the display CPU 72, these cycles are predetermined cycles. Is almost constant. The sound-light side MPU 62 can derive the original pointer information of the execution target table in the case where the interruption of the task processing has not occurred in the display CPU 72 from the current pointer information of the control pattern table. Then, the difference between the derived pointer information and the pointer information obtained from the delay command of the display CPU 72 makes it necessary to match the progress of control in the sound light side MPU 62 with the progress of control in the display CPU 72, It is possible to derive a subtraction value of pointer information of the control pattern table.

  In step S1004, adjustment processing of the pointer information is executed by subtracting the derived subtraction value from the current pointer information of the control pattern table. As a result, even if interruption of task processing occurs in the display CPU 72 and update of pointer information in the execution target table is delayed, execution of the pointer information in the control pattern table in the sound light side MPU 62 is delayed It becomes possible to correspond to the pointer information of the target table.

  The state in which the pointer information of the execution target table is adjusted in relation to task processing will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 21 (a) shows the start timing of the V interrupt processing, FIG. 21 (b) shows the execution period of the task processing, FIG. 21 (c) shows the update timing of the pointer information of the execution target table, d) shows the transmission timing of the delay command, and FIG. 21 (e) shows the timing when the display CPU 72 receives the notification execution command from the sound side MPU 62. In the following description, it is assumed that the pointer information is updated at the timing when the processing of V interrupt processing is newly started, but in actuality, the pointer information is updated later than the timing when the processing of V interrupt processing is newly started. The pointer information is updated at the timing before the task processing is started. The same applies to the output timing of the delay command.

  First, the case where an interruption occurs in the middle of task processing and the notification execution command is not received in the middle of the task processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is started at the timing of t1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 21C, pointer information of the execution target table is updated. Thereafter, task processing is started at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 21B, and the task processing ends at timing t3 which is timing prior to the new activation timing of V interrupt processing (timing at t4). Do. In this case, interruption of task processing does not occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), a new process of the V interrupt process is started at the timing of t4, and pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. Then, at time t5, task processing is started as shown in FIG. 21 (b). However, as shown in FIG. 21A, a new start timing of the V interrupt processing is obtained at timing t6 during execution of the task processing. In this case, the task processing currently being executed is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started.

  At the timing of t6, the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated even if a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started. As a result, task processing is started without updating pointer information in V interrupt processing of the new processing cycle, so data corresponding to pointer information set in the previous processing cycle of V interrupt processing is used. It is possible to execute the task processing that is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21D, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound light side MPU 62 at the timing of t6. Thereby, in a situation where the update of the pointer information in the execution target table of the display CPU 72 is delayed, it becomes possible to adjust the pointer information of the control pattern table of the sound-light side MPU 62 according to the delay.

  Next, a case where interruption of task processing occurs and a notification execution command is received in the middle of the task processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), a new process of the V interrupt process is started at the timing of t9, and the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Then, at time t10, task processing is started as shown in FIG. 21 (b). However, as shown in FIG. 21A, a new start timing of the V interrupt processing is obtained at timing t12 during execution of the task processing. In this case, the task processing currently being executed is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started.

  However, the timing of t11 which is later than the timing of t10 which is the start timing of the task processing which is the interruption target and which is earlier than the timing of t12 which is the start timing of the new processing of V interrupt processing At timing, notification execution is received from the sound light side MPU 62 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the task processing is interrupted at the timing of t12 and the new processing of the V interrupt processing is started, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 21D, the delay command is not transmitted.

  Thereafter, at time t13, task processing is started as shown in FIG. 21 (b). In the task processing, regarding the various operation processing for effect, the operation corresponding to the data for one pointer information is left unexecuted in the execution target table for effect, so the setting of various parameter information is as normal. There is a possibility that the image display for presentation may not be performed smoothly due to the fact that it is not performed. On the other hand, since various kinds of arithmetic processing for notification are started in the task processing, it becomes possible to immediately start display of an image for notification. Thereafter, the task processing ends at timing t14, which is a timing prior to the new start timing (timing t15) of the V interrupt processing. In this case, interruption of task processing does not occur.

  When a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is started, the new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited, but the background operation process of step S906, the effect operation process of step S909, and the step S912 At each timing before the symbol calculation process is executed, new start of the V interrupt process is permitted (steps S904, S907 and S910). As a result, when step S904, step S907 or step S910 is executed and it is the start timing of a new processing of the V interrupt processing, that is, 20 msec has already elapsed since the current V interrupt processing was started. If it is, the task processing is interrupted at that time, and a new processing of the V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the period during which the start of a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is awaited despite the start timing of the new processing cycle of V interrupt processing.

  However, even when a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started as described above, data corresponding to the processing result up to that point in the current task processing is stored and held as it is. Further, in this case, address data corresponding to the process being executed immediately before the start of a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is written in the interruption time address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the interruption time address area 111 is referred to at the start of the task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing cycle, and the execution of the processing is resumed from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It is possible to

  When the new start of the V interrupt process is permitted in steps S904, S907 and S910, the background start processing in step S906 after the new start is prohibited in steps S905, S908 and S911, The effect calculation process of S909 and the symbol calculation process of step S912 are executed. This makes it possible to prevent the start of a new process of the V interrupt process during execution of various arithmetic processes. If a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started during execution of various arithmetic processing, it is assumed that the data amount of data in the middle of operation to be stored and held becomes extremely large, and further, a new V interrupt processing is newly generated. The contents of the address data in the case of returning to the state in the middle of the computation in the processing cycle may be complicated. On the other hand, the new start of the V interrupt process is inhibited before the various operation processes are started, so that the new process cycle of the V interrupt process is not started during the various operation processes. It becomes possible.

  When interruption of task processing occurs in the display CPU 72 and task processing is resumed from the interrupted state in the next V interrupt process, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound side MPU 62, The sound information MPU 62 adjusts the pointer information of the control pattern table to correspond to the delay. Thereby, even if the delay occurs, it is possible to synchronize the contents of the execution control of the effect in the sound light side MPU 62 with the contents of the execution control of the effect in the display CPU 72.

  When interruption of task processing occurs in the display CPU 72, the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated by making a negative determination in step S606 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15), and to the sound light side MPU 62 In the configuration where transmission of the delay command is performed, the pointer of the execution target table is determined by not executing the determination processing of step S606 if the delay non-occurrence condition is satisfied even if the interruption of the task processing occurs. Information is updated and no delay command is sent. Specifically, when the execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is newly read out to the work RAM 73, the determination processing in step S606 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S605. Instead, the process of step S 607 is performed. As a result, although there is a possibility that the image display for effect can not be smoothly performed, it is possible to give top priority to the start of the display of the image corresponding to the unauthorized notification or the status notification. That is, even if the execution target table for notification is newly read to the work RAM 73 in the command corresponding process, display of the notification image is performed unless the pointer update processing in step S 607 is subsequently executed for the execution target table. Does not start. On the other hand, when the notification execution target table is newly read out, the pointer updating process in step S 607 is performed even if the interruption of the task processing has occurred last time, whereby the notification It is possible to prevent the start of image display from being delayed.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  The VDP 76 sets the value of the register 92 based on the command sent from the display CPU 72, creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, And the process which outputs an image signal to the symbol display apparatus 41 based on the drawing data created in flame | frame area | region 82a, 82b is performed.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time the drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 when the output start timing of the image signal is determined in advance.

  The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 22 (a) to 22 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information is set, which is information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b drawing data corresponding to an image of one frame in the drawing list is to be drawn. It is done. Further, in the header information, information of presence / absence of designation of decoding and address of moving image data to be decoded is set.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set to be the numerical value information of serial numbers, and the information of the image data to be used in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information is set. In addition, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame are to be drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as graphic sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 22A, background data is set as the first drawing target, sprite data A is set as the second, sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, and then sprite data A is written to overlap the background data, and sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image → effect image → pattern.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, the parameter P (1) of the background data is information of the address of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area where the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the two-dimensional plane when writing the background data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when writing the background data, and the initial state of the background data Information of a scale indicating the magnification when writing to the frame areas 82a and 82b and a uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data for the size set as the state And information of α data specification indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the application target. The types of parameters are the same for sprite data A as shown in FIG.

  The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels constituting the image data, but information of one coordinate is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. In VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and at the time of arranging the image data, make the one pixel at the center be on the designated coordinate. . As a result, the information capacity (that is, the data amount) of the information of the coordinates to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. In addition, since the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 do not have to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one central pixel, and may be, for example, a pixel at an upper left or upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the corner pixels as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

  The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. The α data can make the transmission information different for each pixel within the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting the α value.

  By setting α values and α data uniformly as described above, in a situation where it is sufficient to control the transparency of background data and sprite data uniformly for all pixels instead of finely controlling in pixel units. While it is possible to reduce the necessary data capacity by being able to cope with the uniform α value, it is also possible to finely control the transparency on a pixel basis by applying the α data.

  The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether generation of drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is completed. If creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S1103 a response process at the time of reception is executed.

  In the response processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from which frame area 82a and 82b the drawing data of one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list.

  In the following step S1104, content grasping processing is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the reading target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, in the content comprehension processing, the type of image data initially set as a rendering target in the rendering list is comprehended, and various parameter information of the image data is comprehended. In the writing process, based on the grasped result of the content grasping process in step S1104, the image data of the current drawing object is written to the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation object.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is in the process of being created, update processing of the drawing list counter is executed in step S1106. Thereby, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the processing in step S1104 and step S1105 is performed on the switched image data. That is, by performing the drawing process a plurality of times, drawing data of an image of one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data are processed in one drawing process may be used, or the drawing process may be performed. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing cycle, and may be configured to process different numbers of image data in each processing cycle of drawing processing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or after the process of step S1105 is executed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the image signal output for one frame has been completed in the display circuit 94. If not completed, the present drawing processing is ended as it is, and if completed, the V interruption signal is outputted to the display CPU 72 at step S1108, and then the present drawing processing is ended.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec. Further, although an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data, the double buffer method is adopted as described above, so the output of the image signal is the output. This process is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing of one frame later with respect to such a frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of an image signal of one frame is completed. In this case, the frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are regulated so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Configuration for performing color change effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a color change effect will be described.

  FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the color change effect. In the color change effect, as shown in FIG. 24A-1 to FIG. 24A-3, there is a moving image in which the character CH1 for color change effect performs a predetermined operation in a predetermined period consisting of a plurality of image update timings. When displayed, the effect is that the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 is changed in accordance with the game situation. For example, when a color change effect is executed as an effect for a game, the player is suggested to the player an expectation of reach display occurrence and an expectation to be a big hit depending on the display color of the color change target area CR. Further, when the color change effect is applied not in the pachinko machine 10 but in the slot machine, the color change target area CR may be displayed in a display color according to the type of the winning combination in the internal lottery.

  The color-change effect character CH1 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player that a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both feet is being expressed. The color change target area CR is set at a plurality of places in the color change effect character CH1. Specifically, the color change target area CR is set in the head portion, both shoulder portions and the body portion of the color change effect character CH1. The display colors of the plurality of color change target areas CR are set to the same color. For example, when the display color of the color change target area CR is set to blue, the head part, both shoulders and body part of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in blue, and the display color of the color change target area CR Is set to be red, the head portion, both shoulder portions and torso portion of the color-change effect character CH1 are displayed in red. Further, at the final stage of the color change effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (a-3), the color change effect effect image EG1 is displayed for the color change effect character CH1. The effect image includes an image representing blast, an image representing water droplets, a light emission image representing a state in which light is emitted from the light source to the surroundings, and an aura image representing that the circumference of the character is emitting light. Is an image for enhancing visual effects. As the color change effect effect image EG1, an image in which light rays are emitted from the color change effect character CH1 to the surroundings is displayed.

  When performing color change effects, base still image data BD1, BD2, BD3 shown in FIG. 24 (b-1) to FIG. 24 (b-3), and FIG. 24 (c-1) to FIG. The part image data PD1, PD2 and PD3 shown in 3) are used. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying the color-change effect character CH1. The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are image data for overwriting the color change target area CR in the character CH1 for color change effect based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and to add the effect image EG1 for color change effect Image data. After drawing the base still image data BD1 to BD3 shown in FIG. 24 (b-1) to FIG. 24 (b-3) in the frame areas 82a and 82 b of the drawing target, FIG. 24 (c-1) to FIG. By drawing the part image data PD1 to PD3 shown in c-3), as shown in FIG. 24 (a-1) to FIG. 24 (a-3), color change effect is produced on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 While the character CH1 is displayed, the display color of the color change target area CR is changed according to the situation.

  Hereinafter, a specific configuration for executing a color change effect will be described. First, a data configuration for executing a color change effect will be described. FIG. 25 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration of the memory module 74 for executing a color change effect. As shown in FIG. 25A, the memory module 74 includes base moving image data BMD for enabling derivation of the base still image data BD1 to BD3, and first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3. A color palette data group CP is stored in advance.

  The base moving image data BMD is image data compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to still image data for one frame, and encoded according to, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the base moving image data BMD is decoded, it is expanded into still image data of a plurality of frames. Specifically, in the base moving image data BMD, file data is set at the first address, and then compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data is I frame data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data And. The I picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one or more frames prior to decoding. . B picture data is bi-directionally predicted by referring to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames before and I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames after decoding. , One frame worth of still image data can be created. In the compressed data of the base moving image data BMD, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the mth frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) -th frame,..., N-1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  The number of pieces of base still image data BD1 to BD3 created by expanding the base moving image data BMD corresponds to all the frames included in the execution period of the color change effect. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying only the color change effect character CH1 as shown in FIG. 24 (b-1) to FIG. 24 (b-3). By utilizing all the base still image data BD1 to BD3, it is possible to display a moving image in which the character CH1 for color change effect performs an operation according to a predetermined operation path. Further, in each pixel of the base still image data BD1 to BD3, color information of one byte is set for each of RGB, and an opaque α value is set.

  The first to n-th parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in the same number as the base still image data BD1 to BD3 so as to correspond to the base still image data BD1 to BD3 on a one-to-one basis. As shown in FIGS. 24 (c-1) to 24 (c-3), the first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3 correspond to the color change effect character CH1 based on the corresponding base still image data BD1 to BD3. It is set to be able to display the color change target area CR at the same position, shape and size as the color change target area CR. In this case, data is set such that each of the part image data PD1 to PD3 is displayed at a position where the plurality of color change target areas CR are apart, but the plurality of color change target areas CR are collectively The data of the frame area FR that fills the space between the plurality of color change target areas CR is set so that it can be treated as one image data. The color information is not set to each pixel of the frame region FR, and furthermore, the completely transparent α value is set. On the other hand, although color information of one byte is set in each pixel of the color change target area CR, the α value is not set. Therefore, when parts image data PD1 to PD3 are overwritten on base still image data BD1 to BD3, an image by parts image data PD1 to PD3 is displayed for color change target area CR, but other areas The image by the base still image data BD1 to BD3 is displayed as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 24C, in the parts image data for a plurality of frames from the frame at an intermediate timing on the end side of the color change effect to the frame at the end timing among the parts image data PD1 to PD3. Data for displaying not only the color change target area CR but also the effect image EG1 for color change effect is set. Color information for one byte is set to each pixel for displaying the effect image EG1 for color change rendering, and an α value set as a semi-transparent value is set. When such parts image data is overwritten on the base still image data, not only the color change target area CR is overwritten in the color change effect character CH1, but also the color change effect as shown in FIG. 24 (a-3) A translucent effect image EG1 for color change effect is displayed around the character CH1. Then, the state in which the effect image for color change effect EG1 is displayed in this manner is continued over a plurality of frames up to the frame of the end timing.

  The color palette data group CP includes a plurality of color palettes CP1 and CP2 for specifying the display color to be applied to the color information of the color change target area CR in each of the part image data PD1 to PD3. The color palettes CP1 and CP2 are table data in which color information is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with all data that can be set for each pixel of the part image data PD1 to PD3, and the color palette CP1 to be used , CP2 to derive color information corresponding to the data set in each pixel.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) and FIG. 25 (b-2), data is set such that the color pallets CP1 and CP2 have different colors as the basis. For example, in the case of the color pallet CP1 of FIG. 25 (b-1), the color is red on the basis, and in the case of the color pallet CP2 of FIG. 25 (b-2), the color is green. Therefore, when the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25 (b-1) is applied, the color change target area CR based on each of the part image data PD1 to PD3 is based on red, and the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25 (b-1) When is applied, the color change target area CR based on each of the part image data PD1 to PD3 is based on green. Since color palettes CP1 and CP2 are data in which only the relationship between color information and display color is defined, the data capacity of one color palette CP1, CP2 is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3, Furthermore, the sum of the data capacities of all the color pallets CP1 and CP2 included in the color pallet data group CP is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, in a configuration in which three or more types of display colors of the color change target area CR are set, the sum of all data capacities of the part image data PD1 to PD3 and all data capacities of the color pallets CP1 and CP2 is a base The data capacity of the moving image data BMD is smaller than the data capacity doubled. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for the type of display color of the color change target area CR, it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary to store the image data in advance.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the color change effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing calculation processing for a color change effect performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the color change effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). Further, the calculation process for the color change effect is started when the information on the color change effect is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is time to start the color change effect (step S1201: YES), each address of the base moving image data BMD and the first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3 in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1202 and step S1203). Further, the address in the memory module 74 of the color pallets CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the display color set in the current execution target table is grasped (step S1204). Thereafter, color change effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 in step S1205.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201 or if the process of step S1205 is executed, various addresses corresponding to the current frame number set in the current pointer information in the execution target table are grasped (step S1206). Specifically, when the base moving image data BMD is decoded and the base still image data BD1 to BD3 for a plurality of frames are expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the base still image data corresponding to the current frame number In the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address of the area in which the BD1 to BD3 are stored, the address of the area in which the part image data PD1 to PD3 corresponding to the current frame number is stored in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 The address of the area where the color pallets CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the display color of this time are stored is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1207, various parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be used this time are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is derived from these base still image data The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to BD1 to BD3 and part image data PD1 to PD3. Thereafter, in step S1208, color change effect designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  As described above, when the color change effect calculation process is executed, the drawing list output process (step S609) to be transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process includes the base still image data BD1 corresponding to the current frame number. The BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 are set as drawing objects, and color pallets CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are set as use objects. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 is set, and color change effect designation information is set. When it is the start timing of the color change effect, the color change effect start specification information is set.

  Next, the setting process for the color change effect and the writing process for the color change effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for color change effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the writing process for color change effect is a drawing process (FIG. 23) It is executed as a part of the writing process performed in step S1105 of FIG. When color change effect specification information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the color change effect and the writing process for the color change effect are executed. Here, in the drawing list, the color change effect designation information is set in association with the image data for effect, so the setting process for color change effect and the writing process for color change effect are included in the current drawing list. It is started when the rendering order of the image data for presentation comes.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing setting processing for a color change effect.

  When the color change effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1301: YES), the base moving image data BMD is stored in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area is grasped, and the base moving image data BMD is read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasping result (step S1302). Then, decoding processing of the base moving image data BMD is executed using the moving image decoder 93 (step S1303). As a result, all of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are expanded and stored in the base moving image area provided in the expansion buffer 81.

  Thereafter, in step S1304, the memory module 74 grasps the address of the area in which the first to n-th parts image data PD1 to PD3 are stored from the information of the address set in the drawing list. Based on this, all of the first to n-th parts image data PD1 to PD3 are read out from the memory module 74 into the parts image area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Also, in step S1305, the address of the area in which the color pallets CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped from the information of the address set in the drawing list, and the memory module is based on the grasped result. The color pallets CP1 and CP2 are read out from 74 into a pallet area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the process of step S1305 is executed, in step S1306, the information on the address at which the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. At the same time, in step S1307, the information on the address at which the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. Further, in step S1308, the parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 is grasped from the information set in the drawing list.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the writing process for the color change effect.

  First, base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be drawn at this time are drawn on the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1401).

  Thereafter, in steps S1402 to S1406, base still image data BD1 in frame areas 82a and 82b of the drawing object according to color pallets PD1 and PD2 corresponding to the display color of parts image data PD1 to PD3 of the current drawing object. -Overwrite each dot on which BD3 is drawn.

  Specifically, first, in step S1402, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time is set in the write processing counter provided in the register 92. Thereafter, in step S1403, color information corresponding to the data set in the pixel corresponding to the value of the current writing processing counter in the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time corresponds to the display color this time Read from the color pallets PD1 and PD2. In step S1404, the color information read out in step S1403 is overwritten on the dots corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

  By the way, when the current pixel corresponds to the frame area FR other than the color change target area CR or the effect image EG1 for color change effect, even if it is any color palette PD1, PD2, colorless color information Is selected and overwritten as the color information becomes completely transparent. In this case, the color information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 written in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn is maintained without being changed. In addition, when the current pixel corresponds to the color change target area CR, color information based on the current display color is overwritten as opaque. When the current pixel corresponds to the color change effect image EG1, color information corresponding to the effect image EG1 is overwritten as semi-transparent.

  Thereafter, the value of the write processing counter of the register 92 is decremented by 1 in step S1405, and it is determined in step S1406 whether the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is "0". If it does not become "0", the writing processing of the pixel corresponding to the value of the writing processing counter after subtraction is executed, and if it becomes "0", the writing processing for the main color change effect is finished as it is .

  Parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided separately from the base moving image data BMD as image data for displaying the character CH1 for color change effect, and base still image data obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD By overwriting the part image data PD1 to PD3 with respect to BD1 to BD3 and changing the types of the color pallets PD1 and PD2 applied to the part image data PD1 to PD3, the color is used while using the same base moving image data BMD It is possible to change the display color of the color change target area CR of the change effect character CH1. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for the type of display color of the color change target area CR, it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary to store the image data in advance.

  The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. Thus, it is possible to set the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 to a predetermined color over the entire display period of the image by the base moving image data BMD.

  By changing the color pallets PD1 and PD2 applied to the part image data PD1 to PD3, the display color of the color change target area CR is changed. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing image data, as compared with the configuration in which combinations of parts image data PD1 to PD3 are prepared in advance by the number of display colors that can be changed.

  In the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD, although the color information is set, the α value to be completely transparent or semitransparent is not set. If still image data with an α value set to be completely transparent or translucent is compressed as moving image data, the α value may adversely affect the difference data and the image quality may be degraded. By not setting the α value to be completely transparent or semitransparent, it is possible to compress image data while preventing such deterioration in image quality. Similarly, the part image data PD1 to PD3 in which the completely transparent or semitransparent α value is set together with the color information are prepared as still image data rather than compressed as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the image quality of the part image data PD1 to PD3.

  Data for displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect is set in the parts image data PD3 for a plurality of frames from the frame at the end timing of the color change effect to the frame at the end timing. The data of the effect image for color change effect EG1 is data in which not only color information but also a semi-transparent α value is set. Therefore, when such data is compressed as the base moving image data BMD, the α value adversely affects the difference data And the image quality may be degraded. On the other hand, by setting the data of the effect image EG1 for color change effect to the part image data PD3 which is still image data, the image quality in the case of displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect is good It becomes possible to

<Another form of configuration concerning color change effect>
-The content of the image added by setting other image data so as to overlap a plurality of still image data created by decoding the moving image data is a partial area of the character displayed by the moving image data The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the image, and a character different from the character displayed by the moving image data may be added. In this case, moving image display is performed such that the character performs a predetermined operation in the moving image data, and the moving image display is performed so that the other character performs a predetermined operation by the image data added to the still image data by the moving image data. It may be a configuration to be performed.

  -An image corresponding to the other image data is displayed with respect to the image displayed by the moving image data by setting other image data so as to overlap with a plurality of still image data created by decoding the moving image data In the configuration to be added, instead of the configuration in which the content of the image to be added is changed by providing a plurality of the other image data, the same for the plurality of still image data created by the moving image data The same still image may be added to the moving image display created by the moving image data by overlappingly setting the image data.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are stored as they are as the still image data. The parts image data PD1 to PD3 may be compressed and provided as moving image data. In this case, when performing color change effects, still image data created by decoding both base moving image data BMD and moving image data corresponding to parts image data PD1 to PD3 and decoding base moving image data BMD On the other hand, it is necessary to overlap and set still image data created by decoding the latter moving image data.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the still image data created by decoding the base moving image data BMD, and the base moving image data BMD is decoded The configuration may be such that still image data created by performing the processing is more than the part image data PD1 to PD3. In this case, the same parts image data PD1 to PD3 are applied to each still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at a plurality of predetermined update timings. For example, in a configuration in which the display position, shape and size of the color change target area CR are changed only once for a plurality of update timings, the part image data PD1 to PD3 may be provided by the number of the change timings. . Thus, the number of part image data PD1 to PD3 can be reduced. Further, the part image data PD1 to PD3 may be configured to have more parts than the still image data generated by decoding the base moving image data BMD. In this case, different part image data PD1 to PD3 can be set for the same still image data created from the base moving image data BMD, and the color change target area with the color change effect character CH1 kept still It becomes possible to move or deform the CR.

  · Limited to a configuration in which only one part image data PD1 to PD3 is applied to still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at each update timing of a period during which moving image display is performed by the base moving image data BMD However, two or more parts image data may be applied at one update timing.

<Configuration for effect presentation>
Next, a configuration for effect effecting will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.29 (a)-FIG.29 (e) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating an effect production.

  In the effect effect, as shown in FIG. 29A, the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect effect character CH2 from the front of the display surface P in a situation where the moving image display of the effect effect character CH2 is being performed. It is an effect to be displayed. Specifically, an image representing smoke is displayed as the effect image EG2.

  In the memory module 74, character still image data SD is stored in advance as image data for displaying the effect effect character CH2. A plurality of character still image data SD is provided so that the effect effect character CH2 can perform a predetermined operation in the execution period of the effect effect. As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the character still image data SD should be treated as a rectangular image by data for displaying the effect effect character CH2 as an individual image and the character still image data SD. And the data of a frame area FR1 set so as to surround the periphery of the effect effect character CH2.

  The image data ED1 for effects is previously stored in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect image EG2. A plurality of effect image data ED1 is provided so that the effect image EG2 can be changed in a predetermined manner in the execution period of the effect effect. As shown in FIG. 29C, the effect image data ED1 makes it possible to handle data for displaying the effect image EG2 as an individual image and an image by the effect image data ED1 as a rectangular image. And data of a frame area FR2 set to surround the periphery of the effect image EG2.

  The character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are formed to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. In addition, since the alpha value of opaque or semi-transparent is set to the pixels constituting the effect effect character CH2 and the effect image EG2, the object to be displayed on the display surface P is to be displayed, but the frame regions FR1 and FR2 are configured. Since the pixel is set to a completely transparent α value, it is not to be displayed on the display surface P.

  As already described, the frame areas 82a and 82b in which the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and color information is stored in each unit area. Area is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), color information storage areas 121a to 121c each consisting of one byte are set in each unit area 121 in one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. The setting of 256 colors is possible for each of RGB.

  As the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c is smaller, a darker color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the minimum value, black is displayed. In addition, as the value of the numerical information is larger, the color of the brighter in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. In the configuration that can display only 256 colors instead of the full color method, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c may be only 1 byte.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29E, color information including numerical information is set to each pixel 122 of the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 as shown in FIG. In each pixel 122, color information defining areas 122a to 122c each consisting of 1 byte are set corresponding to each color of RGB on a one-to-one basis, and 256 colors can be displayed on each of RGB.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set not to 3 bytes but to 1 byte, and in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, The color information definition areas 122a to 122c may also be set by one byte.

  In each pixel 122, in addition to the color information defining areas 122a to 122c, an α value defining area 122d is set, and information of the α value is set. A storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as the α value defining area 122d, but in practice, any decimal value “0 to 100” numerical information is set. Further, the information of the α value is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1”, and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

  When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, each numerical information obtained by integrating the alpha value to each numerical information of RGB in each pixel 122 is for storing color information in the unit area 121 It is stored with respect to each area of RGB of areas 121a-121c. In this case, when the opaque α value (specifically, “1”) is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten on the corresponding unit area 121 as it is, and the completely transparent α value ( Specifically, when “0” is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is not written to the corresponding unit area 121.

When 0 <α value <1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed between the image to be superimposed on the back side of the display surface P, and the calculation result is output to the unit area 121. Will be written. In the case where a pixel for which 0 <α value <1 in the character still image data SD is written in the unit area 121, blending processing is performed with the image to be superimposed on the back side of the display surface P. More specifically, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is "r1, g1, b1", and the color information to be written next in the unit area 121 is "r2, g2, b2". Assuming that the α value set along with the color information is α1:
R: r1 × (1−α1) + r2 × α1
G: g1 × (1−α1) + g2 × α1
B: b1 × (1−α1) + b2 × α1
It becomes.

On the other hand, in the case of the effect image data ED1, 0 <α value <1 is set as the translucent α value for all pixels for displaying the effect image EG2. And when drawing the said pixel in frame area 82a, 82b, the addition process of the pixel for displaying effect image EG2 is performed with respect to each unit area 121 in frame area 82a, 82b of drawing object. . More specifically, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is "r3, g3, b3", and the color information of the effect image EG2 written in the unit area 121 is "r4, g4, b4". When the α value set in addition to the color information is α2,
R: r3 + r4 x α2
G: g3 + g4 × α2
B: b3 + b4 × α2
It becomes.

  By performing the addition process, the effect image EG2 corresponding to the effect image data ED1 reflects the color information and the degree of brightness of the effect effect character CH2 on which the effect image EG2 is to be superimposed. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image EG2 is an image that transmits the rear side such as smoke, so that it causes a sense of discomfort if it is displayed regardless of the effect effect character CH2. On the other hand, when the addition process is performed as described above, the effect image EG2 is displayed in a state in which the effect effect character CH2 is reflected, and the appearance does not occur, and the appearance is It becomes desirable.

  As described above, when the effect image EG2 is applied, addition processing is performed, but when the similarly bright effect image EG2 is superimposed on the bright image, the color is displayed in the unit area 121 of the frame area 82a, 82b. The information storage areas 121a to 121c have the maximum value, and may deviate from the intention of the designer to be displayed in white (so-called occurrence of whiteout). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect presentation is performed while suppressing the occurrence of the overexposure.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing effect presentation while suppressing the occurrence of overexposure will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing for effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for effect effect is executed in the calculation process for effect in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). Further, the calculation processing for the effect presentation is started when the information on the effect presentation is set in the execution target table currently set.

  First, in step S1501, character data to be displayed is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The character data includes character still image data SD, and character still image data SD of a type corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display target. Incidentally, when the effect effect is executed, the effect effect character CH2 is displayed as a moving image as if performing a predetermined operation over a plurality of frames in a situation where the effect image EG2 is not displayed, and then the moving image is displayed. The display in which the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect rendering character CH2 is performed over a plurality of frames. In the subsequent step S1502, the parameter information of the character still image data SD grasped in step S1501 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the character still image data SD. Update control information by writing to the area.

  In the following step S1503, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not the effect image data ED1 should be applied. When it is necessary to apply the effect image data ED1, in step S1504, the effect image data ED1 of a type corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display target. In the subsequent step S1505, the parameter information of the effect image data ED1 grasped in step S1504 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the effect image data ED1. Update the control information by writing. Thereafter, in step S1506, effect generation designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect image data ED1 should be used is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  In the following step S1507, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether it is time to execute partial addition processing, which is processing for suppressing the occurrence of overexposure when applying the effect image data ED1. judge. If it is the execution timing of the partial addition process, partial addition designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the partial addition process should be performed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 in step S1508.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, effect presentation designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect presentation should be performed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  As described above, when calculation processing for effect effects is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes a character still image corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. The data SD is set as a drawing target, and when it is a period during which the effect image EG2 is displayed, the effect image data ED1 is set as a drawing target. Further, parameter information to be applied to the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 is set in the drawing list. Further, the effect presentation designation information is set in the drawing list, the effect occurrence designation information is set in the display period of the effect image EG2, and the partial addition designation information in the execution timing of the partial addition process. It is set. At the start timing of the effect effect, the information on the address where the character still image data SD is stored in the memory module 74 and the information on the address where the effect image data ED1 is stored are specified in the drawing list. Be done.

  Next, setting processing for effect presentation and writing processing for effect presentation performed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the writing process for effect effect is a step of the drawing process (FIG. 23) It is executed as a part of the writing process executed in S1105. Further, when the effect presentation designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the effect presentation and the writing process for the effect presentation are performed. Here, in the drawing list, since the effect presentation designation information is set in association with the image data for presentation, the setting process for the effect presentation and the writing process for the effect presentation are for the presentation among the current drawing list. It is started when the drawing order of the image data is reached.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing setting processing for effect effect.

  In step S1601, the address of the area in which the character still image data SD to be drawn indicated in the drawing list is read out in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. The character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 used in the effect presentation are read from the memory module 74 and written in a predetermined area of the expansion buffer 81 at the start timing of the effect presentation. In the following step S1602, parameter information to be applied to the character still image data SD to be drawn this time is grasped.

  If the effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1603: YES), the image data ED1 for the effect to be drawn currently indicated in the drawing list is the buffer 81 for expansion of the VRAM 75 in step S1604. The address of the area being read out is grasped. Thereafter, in step S1605, parameter information to be applied to the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is grasped.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the writing process for effect effect.

  First, the character still image data SD to be drawn at this time is drawn on the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1701).

  If the effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1702: YES), a process for applying the effect image data ED1 is executed in steps S1703 to S1712. Specifically, first, at step S1703, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is set in the writing processing counter provided in the register 92. Thereafter, in step S1704, it is determined whether partial addition designation information is set in the drawing list. If partial addition designation information is set, the setting processing for partial addition shown in steps S1705 to S1708 is performed, and then the addition processing shown in steps S1709 to S1711 is performed. When the partial addition designation information is not set, the addition processing is performed without executing the setting processing for partial addition.

  A case where the addition process is performed without executing the setting process for partial addition will be described. First, each of the RGB color information and α value set in the pixel corresponding to the value of the current writing process counter in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to the RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). Thereafter, the value of the write process counter is decremented by 1 (step S1711). As a result, the integration result of the color information and the α value set to the corresponding pixel of the effect image data ED1 is added as it is to the color information set to the pixel of the character still image data SD. .

  The case where the addition process is performed after the setting process for the partial addition will be described. At the time of setting processing for partial addition, first, RGB color information set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the image data ED1 for effect to be drawn this time is read (step S1705). Then, the read color information is inverted (step S1706). At the time of this inversion, for each of RGB, the read out color information is subtracted from "255" which is the maximum value of the color information. Further, the value of the inverted result, that is, the value obtained by subtracting the read out color information from "255" is divided by "255" which is the maximum value of the color information (step S1707). Thereafter, the value of the division result is integrated with each of the RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1708).

  In this case, since the division result is “1” for pixels for which “0” is set as color information in the effect image data ED1, the division results are integrated in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. The dot color information does not change. On the other hand, the division result is a value less than 1 for pixels for which one or more values are set as color information in the effect image data ED1. The color information of the dots, in which the division results of the values less than 1 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn are integrated, become smaller than the values originally set.

  After that, each of the RGB color information and the alpha value set in the pixel corresponding to the value of the current writing process counter in the effect image data ED1 of the current drawing object are integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to the RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). Thereafter, in step S1711, the value of the write processing counter is decremented by 1, and in step S1712, it is determined whether the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is “0”. If it is not "0", the writing process of the pixel corresponding to the value of the writing process counter after subtraction is executed, and if it is "0", the writing process for this effect effect is ended as it is .

  By performing the setting process for partial addition as described above, the color information of the character still image data SD already drawn in each unit area 121 of the frame areas 82a and 82b is reduced to a small value. This makes it possible to reduce the value of the color information of the unit area 121 to which the effect image data ED1 is added in a state before the addition processing is performed, and to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

  This reduction is performed by integrating values obtained by dividing each color information of the effect image data ED1 by the maximum value of the color information, and therefore, in each unit area 121 of the frame areas 82a and 82b, The color information is greatly reduced (that is, small values are integrated) as the unit area 121 in which the color information of the effect image data ED1 to be applied is larger. As a result, the reduction amount of color information in advance becomes larger as the unit area 121 to which pixels of large color information are applied in the effect image data ED1 becomes larger, and the color information of the unit area 121 with high possibility of whiteout highlight is emphasized Can be reduced in advance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the reduction amount of the color information set by the still image data SD for the character in the unit area 121 where the possibility of the occurrence of the overexposure is low, and maintain the display content of the character CH2 for effect effect It becomes possible.

  The reduction of color information according to the contents of the color information of the effect image data ED1 is performed using the effect image data ED1. Thus, compared with the configuration in which the image data for partial addition other than the effect image data ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74, data necessary for storing the image data in the memory module 74. It is possible to reduce the capacity.

<Another form of the configuration relating to effect presentation>
-Instead of the configuration in which reduction of color information is performed using the effect image data ED1, reduction data different from the effect image data ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74, and the reduction data is stored. The color information may be reduced by applying to the character still image data SD. In this case, the reduction data is applied to the portion where data corresponding to relatively bright color information in the effect image data ED1 is applied than the portion where data corresponding to relatively dark color information is applied. By setting so as to become large, it becomes possible to reduce color information in a mode according to the data content of the effect image data ED1 as in the above embodiment.

  · While color information is reduced for portions where color information greater than a predetermined value in the effect image data ED1 is set in the color information set by the character still image data SD, the character still image data SD is reduced. The color information may not be reduced in portions where color information equal to or greater than a predetermined value in the effect image data ED1 is not set in the color information set by the above.

  The color information of a portion where color information of a pixel for which the completely transparent α value (specifically, “0”) in the effect image data ED1 is set in the character still image data SD is set It may be configured not to reduce the In this case, even if the addition process of the effect image data ED1 is performed, it is possible to surely exclude the part where the whiteout does not occur from the reduction target of the color information, and display the image with the content to be displayed originally. Is possible.

  A target for reducing color information in accordance with color information of each pixel set in the effect image data ED1 is not limited to only the color information set by the character still image data SD, and a character It may be both color information set by the still image data SD for image and color information set in the image data ED1 for effects, and the color information set by the still image data SD for character is reduced Instead, only the color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced.

  The color information set by the character still image data SD may be reduced according to the color information set by the character still image data SD, and the color set by the character still image data SD The color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced according to the information.

<Configuration for Developmental Effects>
Next, a configuration for performing developmental effects will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.33 (a)-FIG.33 (e) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating a development effect.

  With developmental effects, the types of effect images to be applied change with the progress of the effects, and the types of effect images increase so that the content of the entire effect image becomes more flashy in stages It is an effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33A, the first effect image EG3 in which a light beam is emitted from the center to the outside is displayed as a moving image in the first stage of the rendering effect, and the first effect image EG3 is displayed. The second effect image EG4 in which particles move from the center to the outside is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 33 (b) in the two-stage effect period, and is shown in the third effect period in the development effect. As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the moving image is displayed with both the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 superimposed, and as shown in FIG. In addition to the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4, the third effect image EG5 in which the ring of light spreads outward from the center side is a moving image It is shown.

  The development effect is executed as a game effect, and the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the reach display or the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result becomes higher as it goes to the later stage. That is, when the process is completed only in the first stage, the process is performed up to the second stage after the first stage, and the process is completed up to the third stage after the first stage to the second stage, and Each of the steps from stage 3 to stage 4 is executed and finished until stage 4 is set as the execution pattern of the development effect, and the degree of expectation is the case where the development pattern of the execution pattern on the rear side is executed Becomes higher.

  In the development effect, the display contents of the effect images EG3 to EG5 are changed in a plurality of steps as described above, but the effects stored in advance in the memory module 74 for displaying the effect images EG3 to EG5 in the development effect The number of image data ED2 to ED4 is smaller than the number of stages of the development effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33E, the memory module 74 combines the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 as image data for executing the development effect. The effect image data ED4 is stored in advance.

  The first effect image data ED2 is image data for displaying only the first effect image EG3 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the first effect image EG3 is predetermined in the first-stage effect period. A plurality of units are provided so that they can be changed in the aspect of. The first effect image data ED2 can be used to display data for displaying the first effect image EG3 as an individual image and to handle an image by the first effect image data ED2 as a rectangular image. Data of a frame area set to surround the periphery of the effect image EG3 is provided. A semitransparent α value (0 <α value <1) is set to the pixels constituting the first effect image EG3 and therefore the display object is to be displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels constituting the frame area are completely Since the transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

  The second effect image data ED3 is image data for displaying only the second effect image EG4 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the second effect image EG4 is predetermined in the second-stage effect period. A plurality of units are provided so that they can be changed in the aspect of. The second effect image data ED3 is a second image data ED3 for displaying the second effect image EG4 as an individual image and a second effect image data ED3 so as to be able to handle the image as a rectangular image. Data of a frame area set to surround the periphery of the effect image EG4 is provided. A semitransparent α value (0 <α value <1) is set to the pixels constituting the second effect image EG4 and therefore the display object is to be displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels constituting the frame area are completely Since the transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

  The composite effect image data ED4 is image data for displaying all the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image are generated in the fourth stage of the presentation period. A plurality of effect images EG5 are provided so as to be able to change in a predetermined manner. The composite effect image data ED4 has data for displaying the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4 and the third effect image EG5 as individual images, and an image by the composite effect image data ED4 as a rectangular image. In order to enable handling, the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the data of the frame area set to surround the third effect image EG5 are provided. Since the translucent alpha value (0 <α value <1) is set to the pixels constituting the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5, the display target on the display surface P However, since a completely transparent α value is set to the pixels constituting the frame area, it is not to be displayed on the display surface P.

  Here, a configuration in which only the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the combined effect image data ED4 are stored in advance as image data for displaying the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect In the above, there is no effect image data corresponding to the third stage of the rendering period. On the other hand, by using both the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 in the third stage of the rendering period, the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are obtained. The movie is displayed in a state where both are superimposed.

  The manner in which the development effect is executed using the effect image data ED2 to ED4 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34 (a) shows the usage period of the first effect image data ED2, FIG. 34 (b) shows the usage period of the second effect image data ED3, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the composite effect image data ED4. Indicates the usage period of

  The first effect image data ED2 is used as shown in FIG. 34 (a) in the first stage effect period executed from the timing t1 to the second timing, and the second effect image data ED3 and the second effect image data ED3 are used. The composite effect image data ED4 is not used. In the second stage of the effect period executed from the timing t2 to the third timing, the second effect image data ED3 is used as shown in FIG. 34 (b), and the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED2 are used. The composite effect image data ED4 is not used.

  In the third-stage effect period executed from the timing t3 to the fourth timing, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image Both data ED3 are used, and the composite effect image data ED4 is not used. In the fourth stage effect period executed from the timing t4 to the fifth timing, as shown in FIG. 34C, the composite effect image data ED4 is used, and the first effect image data ED2 and the fifth effect data are generated. 2 The effect image data ED3 is not used.

  The specific processing configuration for executing the development effect will be described below. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for development effect performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the development effect is executed in the calculation processing for effect in step S909 in the task processing (FIG. 19). The arithmetic processing for the development effect is started when information about the development effect is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is the start timing of the development effect (step S1801: YES), each address of the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3 and the composite effect image data ED4 in the memory module 74 is grasped ( Step S1802). Then, in step S 1803, development effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the development effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is the first stage effect period (step S1804: YES), the first effect image data ED2 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1805) . Also, for control, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the first effect image data ED2. The information of is updated (step S1806). Thereafter, in step S1807, the first stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the first stage effect period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is the second stage effect period (step S1808: YES), the second effect image data ED3 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1809) . Also, for control, the parameter information of the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the second effect image data ED3. The information of is updated (step S1810). Thereafter, in step S1811, second stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is a second stage rendering period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is the effect period of the third stage (step S1812: YES), the first effect image data ED2 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1813) And second-effect image data ED3 of a type corresponding to the current update timing (step S1814). Further, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is derived from the work RAM 73 in the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the data ED3 (step S1815). Thereafter, in step S 1816, third stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the third stage effect period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When it is not the effect period of the third stage (step S1812: NO), it means that it is the effect period of the fourth step, so the process proceeds to step S1817. In step S1817, the synthetic effect image data ED4 of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. In addition, information for control is obtained by calculating and deriving parameter information of the synthetic effect image data ED4 and writing the derived parameter information in the area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the synthetic effect image data ED4. Are updated (step S1818). Thereafter, in step S 1819, fourth stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is a fourth stage effect period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  As described above, when the processing for development effect is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S 609) includes the effect image data corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. ED2 to ED4 are set as drawing objects. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn is set. Further, in the drawing list, any one of the first stage designation information, the second stage designation information, the third stage designation information and the fourth stage designation information is set corresponding to the current presentation period, and the development presentation is further started At the timing, development effect start designation information is set.

  Next, setting processing for development effect performed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for development effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any one of the first to fourth step designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the development effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the first to fourth effect designation information are set in association with the image data for effect, the setting process for the development effect is image data for effect in the drawing list of this time. It is started when it becomes the drawing order of.

  When the development effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1901: YES), the memory module 74 stores the first effect image data ED2 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The effect image from the memory module 74 is grasped based on the grasped address, the address where the second effect image data ED3 is stored, and the address where each composite effect image data ED4 is stored. All the data ED2 to ED4 are read out to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1902).

  If the first-step designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1903: YES), the image data ED2 for the current first effect shown in the drawing list is for expanding the VRAM 75 in step S1904. The address of the area being read out in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the following step S1905, parameter information to be applied to the current first effect image data ED2 is grasped.

  If the second-step designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1906: YES), the image data ED3 for the second effect shown in the drawing list is for expanding the VRAM 75 in step S1907. The address of the area being read out in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the subsequent step S1908, parameter information to be applied to the second effect image data ED3 of this time is grasped.

  If the third step designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1909: YES), the image data ED2 for the current first effect shown in the drawing list is for expansion of the VRAM 75 in step S1910. While grasping the address of the area being read out in the buffer 81, the image data ED3 for the second effect shown in the drawing list is read out by the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S1911. Know the address of the area you are in In the following step S1912, the parameter information to be applied to the current first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 is grasped.

  If the first to third step designation information is not set in the current drawing list (step S1909: NO), the process proceeds to step S1913 to mean that the effect period is the fourth step. In step S1913, the address of the area in which the image data ED4 for synthetic effects of this time indicated in the drawing list is read out in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. In the subsequent step S1914, parameter information to be applied to the image data ED4 for composite effect of this time is grasped.

  By executing the setting process for the development effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S1105), the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn for the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn are parameter information It is drawn in the applied state.

  In the third stage of the rendering period in which the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are superimposed and displayed as a moving image, the composite effect image data in which both the effect images EG3 and EG4 are collectively set is displayed. Using the first effect image data ED2 to be drawn in the first stage of the rendering period and the second effect image data ED3 to be drawn in the second stage of the rendering period instead of preparing in advance With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary to store the effect image data in advance. On the other hand, for the effect period of the fourth stage in which the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are simultaneously displayed, a combined effect in which the effect images EG3 to EG5 are collectively set. Image data ED4 is prepared in advance. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the effect images EG3 to EG5 are simultaneously displayed using three types of effect image data. That is, according to the above configuration, it is possible to achieve an effect of gradually increasing the number of types of effect images EG3 to EG5 while balancing the storage capacity of the memory module 74 and the processing load.

<Another form of configuration related to developmental effects>
The effect image data for displaying the third effect image EG5 may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, each of the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 can be individually displayed in different display periods, and one composite effect image data ED4 is used. It is possible to simultaneously display the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5. Further, in the present configuration, it is possible to display an image of any two combinations of the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5.

<Configuration for Simultaneous Display Effects>
Next, a configuration for performing simultaneous display effects will be described.

  The simultaneous display effect is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37A, a timing at which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed simultaneously increases halfway and the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 further increases. The effect is that the display of the increase effect image EG6 is started. The increase effect image EG6 is an image in which waves propagate from the center to the outside. The increase effect image EG6 is displayed so as to change in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period from the timing at which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 simultaneously increase to the update timing of a plurality of frames.

  As the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 37B, the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are stored in advance in the memory module 74. ing. Although both the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, the simple effect image data ED6 is more than the normal effect image data ED5. The difference is that the number of pixels is small. In addition, since the normal effect image data ED5 has the same number of pixels as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, the simple effect image data ED6 displays the effect characters CH3 to CH7. It can be said that the number of pixels is smaller than that of image data.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-1) and FIG. 37 (c-2), the number of pixels of the simple effect image data ED6 is half that of the normal effect image data ED5. There is. Therefore, in order to display the increase effect image EG6 with the same size, when the image data ED6 for the simple effect is to be drawn, the scale is larger than when the image data ED5 for normal effect is to be drawn. It is necessary to double the information of.

  While only one simple effect image data ED6 is provided, the normal effect image data ED5 changes the increase effect image EG6 in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over the update timing of a plurality of frames. There are a number of things that can be done. When the increase effect image EG6 is displayed, as described later in detail, the simple effect image data ED6 is to be used first, and thereafter, the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 is to be used. In this case, the increase effect image displayed by the simple effect image data ED6 so that the increase effect image EG6 can be changed in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over the update timing of a plurality of frames. The display mode of the increase effect image EG6 displayed by the first normal-effect image data ED5 among the plurality of normal-effect image data ED5 has continuity with the display mode of the EG6. .

  The normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are formed into a rectangular image by the data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 and the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6. In order to enable handling, data of a frame area set to surround the periphery of the increase effect image EG6 is provided. A semitransparent α value (0 <α value <1) is set to the pixels that make up the increase effect image EG6, but this is the display target on the display surface P, but the pixels that make up the frame area Since a completely transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

  A state in which the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are selectively used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 38A shows a minority display period in which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed simultaneously is small, and FIG. 38B shows a period in which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed simultaneously is large. 38C shows a period in which the image data for simplified effect ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, and FIG. 38D shows the increase period. This shows a period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as image data for displaying the effect image EG6.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the minority display period is from timing t1 to timing t2. In the small number display period, as shown in FIG. 38A, only two effect characters CH3 and CH4 displayed on the display surface P are displayed.

  When the minority display period ends at the timing of t2, the majority display period is started as shown in FIG. 38 (b). At the timing when the multiple display period is started, the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed on the display surface P increases to five as shown in FIG. 38B, and the increase effect image EG6 is displayed. Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 38C, the simplified effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 at the timing of t2 which is the start timing of the multiple display period. . Thereby, in the configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 are read at the start timing of the large display period, the time required for reading the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. Can be achieved. Therefore, the readout period of the image data at the start timing of the large display period can be shortened, and the increase of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the large display period and the display of the increase effect image EG6 It is possible to preferably perform both of the start and the start. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read out the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the multiple display period starts. There is no need to set up a program for advance transfer.

  The state in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is continued over the update timing of a plurality of frames. Thereafter, at time t3, as shown in FIGS. 38C and 38D, the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is changed from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5. It is switched. This makes it possible to improve the image quality of the increase effect image EG6 more than the period during which the simple effect image data ED6 has been used. Thereafter, at time t4, as shown in FIGS. 38B and 38D, the multiple display period ends and the display of the increase effect image EG6 using the normal effect image data ED5 ends.

  Below, the concrete processing composition for performing simultaneous display production is explained. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for simultaneous display effect performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for simultaneous display effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). The calculation processing for the simultaneous display effect is started when the information about the simultaneous display effect is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is the minority display period (step S2001: YES), it is determined in step S2002 whether it is the start timing of the minority display period. If it is the start timing of the minority display period (step S2002: YES), each address in the memory module 74 of the image data for displaying the presentation characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the minority display period is grasped (step S2003). ). Then, in step S2004, minority display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the minority display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2002 or if the process of step S2004 is performed, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2005). Further, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving parameter information of the image data and writing the derived parameter information in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 73 (step S2006). . Thereafter, in step S2007, minority display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is a minority display period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is a multiple display period (step S2001: NO), it is determined in step S2008 whether it is the start timing of the multiple display period. If it is the start timing of the multiple display period (step S2008: YES), the memory module of the image data and the simplified effect image data ED6 for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6, and CH7 whose display is started in the multiple display period. Each address in 74 is grasped (step S2009). Then, in step S2010, the CPU 71 stores, in the register of the display CPU 72, a large number of display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the large display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started.

  In the case of a large display period and a simple display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: YES), based on the currently set execution target table, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing It grasps (step S2012). In this case, image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the large display period and the image data for simplified effect ED6 are grasped. The control information is updated by calculating and deriving parameter information of the image data and writing the derived parameter information in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 73 (step S2013). . After that, in step S2014, the simplified display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is a simplified display period in which the simplified effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is displayed. Store in the register of

  On the other hand, if it is not the simple display period, that is, if it is the normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 (step S2011: NO), It is determined whether it is the start timing of the normal display period. If it is the start timing of the normal display period (step S2015: YES), the addresses in the memory module 74 for all of the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 are grasped (step S2016). Then, in step S2017, normal display start designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the normal display period should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  In the case of a large display period and a normal display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: NO), based on the currently set execution target table, image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing It grasps (step S2018). In this case, image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the large display period and the normal effect image data ED5 are grasped. The control information is updated by calculating and deriving parameter information of the image data and writing the derived parameter information in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 73 (step S2019). . Thereafter, in step S2020, the normal display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is a normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is displayed. Store in the register of

  As described above, when the calculation process for simultaneous display effects is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S 609) includes the character for effect corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. Image data for displaying CH3 to CH7 is set as a drawing target. Further, in the case of a large display period, either the image data for simplified effect ED6 or the image data for normal effect ED5 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list. In this case, for the normal effect image data ED6, the normal effect image data ED6 of the type corresponding to the corresponding update timing is set as the drawing target. Further, parameter information to be applied to image data to be drawn is set in the drawing list. Further, in the drawing list, one of the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information and the normal display designation information is set corresponding to the current rendering period, and the minority display start designation information at the start timing of each display period. And either of a large number of display start designation information and a normal display start designation information are set.

  Next, setting processing for simultaneous display effect performed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for the simultaneous display effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any of the small number display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting processing for the simultaneous display effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, the minority display specification information, the simple display specification information, and the normal display specification information are set in association with the image data for effect, so the setting process for simultaneous display effect is the current drawing list. Among them, it is started when the rendering order of the image data for effect comes.

  If the minority display designation information is set in the current rendering list (step S2101: YES), it is determined in step S2102 whether the minority display start designation information is further set in the rendering list. When the small number display start designation information is set (step S2102: YES), the effect characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the small number display period in the memory module 74 based on the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the image data for displaying is stored is grasped, and all the image data is read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result (step S2103).

  Also, when the minority display designation information is set (step S2101: YES), the area where the current image data indicated in the drawing list is read out in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2104. Know the address of In the following step S2105, parameter information to be applied to the current image data is grasped.

  When a large number of display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2106: YES), the memory module 74 starts displaying in a large number of display periods from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the image data for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6 and CH7 are stored is grasped, and all the image data are read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result. (Step S2107).

  Also, the memory module 74 recognizes the address of the area where the simplified effect image data ED6 is stored from the information of the address set in the drawing list this time, and based on the grasped result, the memory module 74 uses the memory module 74 for the simplified effect. The image data ED6 is read out to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2108). Then, in step S2109, the enlargement process of the simple effect image data ED6 read out is executed. In the enlargement process, the number of pixels is increased while the interpolation process of color information is performed on the image data ED6 for simple effects, and the number of pixels after the enlargement process becomes the same as the number of pixels of the image data ED5 for normal effects. The effect image data is created and written to the expansion buffer 81.

  Here, the processing time required for the enlargement process is the time required to read one normal effect image data ED5 from the memory module 74 and the time required to read one simple effect image data ED6 from the memory module 74. The time is shorter than the time required for the difference. Thus, even if the enlargement process is performed on the simple effect image data ED6, the processing time can be shortened compared to the case where the normal effect image data ED5 is read at the start timing of the large display period. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, when the normal display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2110: YES), the memory module 74 stores the normal effect image data ED5 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The stored address is grasped, and all the normal effect image data ED5 is read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result (step S2111).

  When simplified display designation information or normal display designation information is set in the current drawing list, the image data of the present time indicated in the drawing list is read out by the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2112. Know the address of the area you are in In this case, if it is a simple display period, the expansion buffer 81 grasps the address of the area where the image data for effect after enlargement processing is written. On the other hand, during the normal display period, the expansion buffer 81 grasps the address of the area from which the normal effect image data ED5 corresponding to the current update timing is read. In the following step S2113, parameter information to be applied to the current image data is grasped.

  By executing setting processing for simultaneous display effect, in the subsequent writing processing (step S1105), in order to display the rendering characters CH3 to CH7 for the frame regions 82a and 82b of the drawing target Image data is drawn with the parameter information applied. Further, the effect image data after enlargement processing is drawn in a state of applying parameter information as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 in the simple display period, and in the normal display period The normal effect image data ED5 for displaying the effect image EG6 is drawn in a state where the parameter information is applied.

  At the start timing of the multiple display period, the simplified effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. Thereby, in the configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 are read at the start timing of the large display period, the time required for reading the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. Can be achieved. Therefore, the readout period of the image data at the start timing of the large display period can be shortened, and the increase of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the large display period and the display of the increase effect image EG6 It is possible to preferably perform both of the start and the start. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read out the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the multiple display period starts. There is no need to set up a program for advance transfer.

  The image data for which the number of pixels is set to reduce the time required to read out the image data is not the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, but for displaying the increase effect image EG6. Image data. This makes it possible to preferably display an image at the start timing of a large display period while preventing the image quality of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 that are noticeable as image display from being degraded.

  When the multiple display period has progressed to a certain extent, the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is changed from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5. Thus, it is possible to make the image quality of the increase effect image EG6 suitable from the middle of the large display period.

  The enlargement process is executed at the read timing of the simple effect image data ED6, and the effect image data after the enlargement process is used in the subsequent simple display period. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the enlargement process is performed each time in the simple display period.

<Another form of the configuration concerning the simultaneous display effect>
The simple effect image data ED6 may be provided as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, but the normal effect image data ED5 may not be provided. Even in this case, it is possible to display the increase effect image ED6 while shortening the time required to read out the image data at the start timing of the large display period. In this configuration, the enlargement process is performed so that the simple effect image data ED6 has the same resolution as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7.

  -Although the simple effect image data ED6 is configured to be set to a half resolution of the normal effect image data ED5, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as a configuration set to 1/4 resolution Alternatively, the configuration may be set to one-third resolution, or may be set to two-third resolution.

  A configuration may be adopted in which there is a period in which the image data for simplified effect ED 6 is enlarged and used as in the above embodiment and a period in which the resolution stored in the memory module 74 is used. For example, when the increase effect image EG6 is displayed using the entire display surface P, the simplified effect image data ED6 is enlarged and used to set a part of the display surface P. When the increase effect image EG6 is displayed within the range of the divided area, the simplified effect image data ED6 may be used with the same resolution.

  In place of the configuration in which only one simple effect image data ED6 is provided, a plurality of simplified effect image data ED6 may be provided. Thus, even when the increase effect image EG6 is displayed using the simple effect image data ED6, it is possible to change the display mode of the increase effect image EG6. In the configuration, at the timing when the display of the increase effect image EG6 using the simplified effect image data ED6 is started, all the simplified effect image data ED6 are not read collectively but used at each update timing. It is preferable that the simple effect image data ED6 to be processed be individually read, and that the enlargement process (step S2109) be performed on the read simple effect image data ED6.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration regarding display control is different from that of the first embodiment. The differences from the first embodiment will be described below. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 41, the main control unit 50 is provided as in the first embodiment. In addition, the main control unit 50 has a payout control unit 55 for controlling the payout unit 56, a power supply function to each device including the main control unit 50, and a power supply for driving and controlling the game ball shooting mechanism 58. A launch control device 57, a special drawing unit 37 for displaying the result of the game play, and a common drawing unit 38 for displaying the result of the common use open lottery are electrically connected. Further, an audio emission control device 60 for driving and controlling the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and the command transmitted from the audio emission control device 60 is further provided. A display control device 130 for controlling the symbol display device 41 based on the display is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. In detail, the display CPU 131 is connected to the input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137 Be done.

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. In addition, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on the command received from the voice emission control device 60, a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a three-dimensional image (3D image) Do. The memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described below.

  The memory module 133 is a storage unit that stores control data including control programs and fixed value data in advance, and also stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory which does not require an external power supply for storing data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write memory as a read only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data to be attached to the object data, and the backmost image of an image of one frame. And image data for the back side constituting an image of the image.

  Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information constituted by a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygon plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as an origin. That is, in each object data, relative positions (i.e., orientation and size) of each polygon are three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  The texture data is an image to be attached to each polygon of the object data, and by attaching the texture data to the object data, a display image including an image corresponding to the object data, such as a pattern or a character, is generated. The way of holding texture data is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette to be referred to in determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

  The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The way of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state of being compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-like object data (i.e., plate polygon) is used.

  The work RAM 132 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 132 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into the internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 134 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 130 is satisfactorily performed. The VRAM 134 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 135 to the memory module 133. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 135 is formed into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to one another via a bus, and also connected to an I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131. The geometry calculation unit 151 reads various image data stored in the memory module 133 into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object data specified as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space finally corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

  The rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes texture data to each clipped object data based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, and determines the appearance of the object data. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object data on a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, performs various adjustments based on depth information, and draws one frame of drawing data as two-dimensional data. Create in buffer 142 The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list, a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute processing according to the contents of the above. In addition, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the processing only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of the frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The present invention is not limited to the full color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b in the frame buffer 142, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

  In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data generated in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is generated in the display circuit 155. It is outputted to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 138. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame regions 142 a and 142 b to be output to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by performing resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

<Basic Process in Display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described. The display CPU 131 executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. The contents of the command interrupt process are the same as in the first embodiment. Further, the contents of the V interrupt process are the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the task process of step S608.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing task processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether "1" is set in the in-delay flag provided in the work RAM 132 or not. If "1" is not set in the under-delay flag (step S2201: NO), the setting process for control start is executed in step S2202. In the setting process for control start, the process for setting an individual image for newly starting control in the display CPU 131 is executed in the current processing cycle. In the present embodiment, the individual image is one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back, and one 3D image defined by a combination of object data and texture data. is there.

  About the setting process for control start Specifically, based on the execution target table currently set, it is determined first whether there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 132 searches an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in order to control the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one to the individual image grasped as the control start target Reserve free buffer space to Furthermore, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameter information for control start according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  In the following step S2202, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed, and is an individual image that may be included in an image of one frame after the current processing cycle.

  Thereafter, a new start of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S2204, and a new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the subsequent step S2205, and the background operation process is executed (step S2206). In the background processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for lightening and darkening, and projection in the world coordinate system are used for the image for the backmost side that constitutes the image of the background and the background character. A process of computing and deriving various kinds of parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test specification is executed.

  After that, in step S2207, a new start of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in the subsequent step S2208, a new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then an effect calculation process is executed (step S2209). In the effect calculation process, the above-mentioned various parameter information is calculated and derived for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect.

  Thereafter, a new start of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S2210, and a new start of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the subsequent step S2211, and then symbol operation processing is executed (step S2212). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameter information is executed on an image of a pattern to be subjected to variable display in each game run.

  Incidentally, in each process of step S2206, step S2209 and step S2212, a process of updating the parameter information for control start set in step S2201 is executed. Also, in each processing of step S2206, step S2209 and step S2212, animation data set so as to change various parameter information of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time image update timing comes is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. Also, animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, in the symbol arithmetic processing, when the execution target table for informing the fraud or the state notification is read in the work RAM 132, the arithmetic processing for displaying the notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information to be applied to the notification sprite are derived.

  After that, in step S2213, "1" is set to the operation completion flag provided in work RAM 132, and in step S2214, processing for grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task processing ends. . In the process of grasping the placement object in the world coordinate system, among the individual images that have been subjected to control update by the processes of steps S2206, S2209, and S2212, the individual images to be set as the drawing object in the current drawing list Execute processing to grasp. The said grasping | ascertainment is performed based on the execution object table currently set. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S2214. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 131 may be identical to the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 135. In this case, the process of step S2214 is executed. There is no need.

  On the other hand, if the in-delay flag is set to “1” (step S2201: YES), after clearing the in-delay flag to “0” in step S2215, the new processing of V interrupt processing in the previous task processing is performed. The process jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before the start of the process (step S2216). This makes it possible to resume the execution of the process from the timing at which the interruption occurred in the previous task process. The contents of the in-delay flag and the operation completion flag are the same as those in the first embodiment, and step S2201, steps S2204 to S2205, steps S2207 to S2208, steps S2210 to S2211, and step S2213 in task processing. And the effect by performing step S2215-step S2216 is the same as that of the said 1st Embodiment.

<Basic processing in VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  The VDP 135 sets the value of the register 153 based on the command sent from the display CPU 131, creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time the drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly performed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 when the output start timing of the image signal is determined in advance.

  The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer is set, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created an image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above-mentioned header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system at the time of creation of the drawing data this time are set. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to become the numerical value information of serial numbers, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 43A, the image data for the back is set as the first drawing object, and the background object A is set as the second, the background object B as the third, and so on. There is. Further, image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the object for effect A is set to the m-th, the object for effect B is set to the m + 1-th,. There is. In addition, the image data for symbols is set as the order after the image data for these effects, for example, the symbol object A is set as the n-th, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1-th, ... There is.

  The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the set order may be the reverse of the above order, and the image for symbols The image data for presentation or the image data for background may be set after the data, and the image data for design is set in the order between the predetermined image data for presentation and the image data for other presentation It may be done.

  The parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... A plurality of types of parameter information are set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the parameter information P (1) of the image data for the back surface includes the information of the address of the area where the image data for the back surface is stored in the memory module 133 and the back surface. Information when setting the image data for the image (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system and the world coordinates when setting the image data for the back side Information on the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle in the system, information on the scale indicating the magnification at the time of setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, In the case of setting image data, uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) is set.

  Here, coordinate information is set individually for all vertices of object data. Also, the information of this coordinate is set to the object data, but not set to the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the object data and the texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 in texture mapping.

  In the parameter information (P1), when the image data for the back side is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, the camera information including the information of the coordinates and the direction of the virtual camera and the image data for the back side are rendered Information of the light including information of the position and orientation of the virtual light source which determines the shadow in the case is set.

  In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. In the Z-buffer method, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) aligned on the Z axis when many objects or a two-dimensional image overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. For the depth adjustment processing method, the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set to the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, a Z sort method is set as a method of performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b for each pixel aligned on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to numerical information corresponding to color information of each pixel aligned on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing of the numerical information and calculation processing for fusion are performed. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, the processing is started when the effect image is displayed.

  In the parameter information (P1), information of α data specification indicating whether or not α data is applied and application target, and information of fog specification indicating whether or not fog is applied and application are set.

  Here, the α value is transmission information of the corresponding pixel. There are two methods of setting the α value on the drawing list: a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as image data. The alpha data can make the transmission information different for each pixel within the same still image data or the same texture data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting the α value.

  As described above, by uniformly setting the α value and the α data, it is possible to control the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data uniformly for all pixels instead of finely controlling it on a pixel basis. In such a situation, it is possible to reduce the necessary data capacity by being able to cope with the uniform .alpha. Value, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying the .alpha. Data.

  Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, in the Z-axis direction. Fog is used when expressing fog or expressing in a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, fog is applied in a fixed manner to an image of one frame. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, another fog is set to the object in a situation where the texture is not displayed because it is too dark when applying the same fog as the other objects to the object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction. It is good to be configured. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect by setting the fog while preventing the above-mentioned texture from being lost.

  In other parameters such as parameter information P (2), as shown in FIG. 43 (c), among various information in FIG. 43 (b) above, instead of the information on the image data for the back, information and texture of the object Information is set. As these pieces of information, information of an address of an area in which an object or texture is stored in the memory module 133 is set.

  The drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 131 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S2302.

  In the setting processing for background, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, image data for the back for displaying a background image and object data for displaying a character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether the image data and object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a vacant buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a vacant buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Thereafter, the memory module 133 grasps and reads the address at which the image data is stored, and coordinates values of the local coordinate system for the image data so as to become the coordinates, rotation angle and scale specified in the drawing list Is converted into coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and is set in the secured buffer area.

  If it is allocated, the update processing of various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area is executed. In addition, in the setting processing for background, control termination processing is executed to delete the image data for background not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In the following step S2303, setting processing for effect is executed. In the effect setting process, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, object data for displaying an effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control end process is executed to delete the image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In the following step S2304, a setting process for symbols is executed. In the setting process for symbols, among the image data specified in the current drawing list, object data for displaying symbols is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for symbols, control end processing is executed to delete the image data for symbols not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  As a result of execution of the processing in steps S2302 to S2304, as shown in FIG. 45, the drawing list is designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, Y axis and Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale which are also designated by the drawing list is completed.

  FIG. 45 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged. Further, the image data PC1 for the rearmost image need not have the coordinate in the Z-axis direction set to the back side with respect to all the various object data PC2 to PC10. By being arranged in a bent or inclined state, coordinates in the Z-axis direction may be on the front side of some object data. However, in the area of the image data PC1 for the backmost image, which has the same coordinates in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction as this part of the object data, As a result, all the object data is not covered by the image data PC1 for the backmost image.

  In the following step S2305, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint are determined by the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set to the origin as the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, the viewpoint PC 11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

  Here, camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in actuality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. . By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image as described above, it is possible to individually perform viewpoint switching, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is enhanced. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 45 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In the subsequent step S2306, conversion processing to the view coordinate system (view space) is executed. In the conversion process to the view coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted to the view coordinate system corresponding to the view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In the following step S2307, clipping processing is performed. In the clipping process, the individual images extracted in step S2306 are grasped with the corresponding viewpoints as the common origin. Then, based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 45) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display surface P of the symbol display device 41) in that state, extraction is performed in step S2306 Clip each individual image that has been

  In the following step S2308, a writing process is performed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the information of the light designated by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  In the following step S2309, color information setting processing is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or in vertex units for each object extracted by the clipping process. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process is performed to paste texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping process. Also, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping may be performed.

  Thereafter, in steps S2310 and S2311, each individual image extracted in step S2307 and further subjected to the lighting process and the setting process of color information is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection) Create drawing data by parallel projection.

  Specifically, first, in step S2310, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the background drawing data creation process, the background image is drawn by performing projection on the screen area PC 12 while performing hidden surface erasure on the image data and object data for the backmost image set as the background image. Create data

  Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 41, and the screen buffer 144 is a background buffer into which background drawing data is written, rendering data and effects for rendering The effect and graphic buffer are set in which drawing data for writing are collectively written. Further, in the buffer for background, the buffer for effect and the pattern, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC 12 is set. The background drawing data created in step S2310 is written to the background buffer. If background image data is not specified in the drawing list, background drawing data is not created.

  In the subsequent step S2311, rendering data creation processing for effect and symbol is executed. In the rendering data creation process for the effect and the symbol, the screen data is projected on the screen area PC 12 while performing hidden surface elimination on the object data set as the effect image and the object data set as the symbol. In the effect and buffer for effect in the buffer 144, drawing data for effect and effect is created. When the effect and symbol image data are not designated in the drawing list, the effect and symbol drawing data are not created.

  Thereafter, in step S2312, the drawing data combining process is performed, and the drawing process ends. In the drawing data combining process of step S2312, the drawing data for background and the drawing data for effect and design that are individually created in the screen buffer 144 individually by the processes of step S2310 and step S2311 are combined, and The combined result is written as drawing data of one frame in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn.

  In this case, the order of writing is specified to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for background → rendering and drawing data for symbols. Therefore, first, drawing data for background is written to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then drawing data for effect and design is written. At this time, the image on the back side is used as it is when the completely transparent α value is set to the pixel for which drawing is to be executed, and the α value is used when the semitransparent α value is set. The fusion of the image on the back side and the image on the front side at the ratio used as the reference is performed, and when the alpha value of opacity is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. , Blending operations are performed.

  By the way, each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, but an alpha value of completely transparent is set for a blank portion where projection is not performed in drawing data for effect and symbol.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec. Further, although an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data, as the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This process is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing of one frame later with respect to such a frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit which alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of an image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn are restricted not to be output targets for outputting an image signal.

  Note that steps S2302 to S2307 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S2308 to S2312 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Configuration for performing loop effect>
Next, a configuration for performing loop effect will be described.

  The loop effect is an effect in which a moving image in which a character for loop effect performs a predetermined action is repeatedly displayed in a predetermined period of time including a plurality of image update timings. The image of the final frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity in the moving image for loop effect. Specifically, the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity so that the player recognizes that the motion of the loop effect character is continuous. As a result, when the same loop effect moving image is displayed again after the loop effect moving image makes one revolution, the motion of the loop effect character can be made smooth.

  The contents of the loop effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of moving image display in loop effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), a plurality of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are simultaneously displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 during loop effect. Specifically, a loop effect A character CH8 and a loop effect B character CH9 are simultaneously displayed. In FIGS. 46A and 46B, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are shown in a simplified manner, but the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 have a face, a body, both hands, both feet, Is displayed to be recognized by the player as a person having the In addition, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are different characters because at least one of the pattern including the facial expression and the pattern of the clothes, the outer shape and the size is different. It is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as it is. During the loop effect, the moving image display is performed so that the player recognizes that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are performing different operations.

  As the loop effect, a first loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46 (a) and a second loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46 (b) are set. In the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect mode, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), for the loop effect A character CH8 that is performed in one round of the corresponding loop effect moving image The operation content is different, and the operation content of the loop effect B character CH9 performed in one round of the corresponding moving image for loop effect is different. And, when the loop effect is executed, after the first animation period in which the moving image for loop effect by the first loop effect mode is repeated multiple times is performed, the moving image for loop effect by the second loop effect mode is A second animation period repeated several times is performed.

  The loop effect is executed as an effect for game circulation, and occurs in the game round that results in a big hit. The first animation period occurs before the combination of the symbols showing that the jackpot result is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, and the second animation period is the symbol showing that the jackpot result is on the display surface P Occurs after the combination of is displayed. Therefore, an action display that is expected to be a big hit result in the first animation period is performed for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, and in the second animation period, the big hit result and An action display for congratulating the player is made on each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9.

  When the loop effect is executed as described above, when the moving image for loop effect is repeated in each of the first loop effect mode and the second effect mode, the loop effect is performed by the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame The motion of the for-use A character CH8 has continuity, and the motion of the loop effect B character CH9 has continuity. On the other hand, between the image of the last frame in the moving image for loop effect by the first loop effect mode and the image of the start frame in the moving image for loop effect by the second loop effect mode, The motion does not have continuity, and the motion of the loop effect B character CH9 does not have continuity.

  Therefore, when the second animation period is performed after the first animation period is performed, the data for displaying the image of the final frame in the moving image for loop effect by the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect The second animation period is started after the interpolation display period is performed in which the interpolation display is performed by the data derived using the data for displaying the image of the start frame in the moving image for loop effect according to the aspect . Hereinafter, a specific configuration for performing the loop effect will be described.

  First, a data configuration for executing loop effects will be described. FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration of the memory module 133 for executing loop effect. As shown in FIG. 47A, in the memory module 133, the first for the A character for causing the A character CH8 for loop effect to perform the operation display corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect by the first loop effect mode. The animation data AD1 and the second animation data AD2 for the A character for causing the A character CH8 for loop presentation to perform the action display corresponding to the moving image for the loop presentation by the second loop presentation aspect and the first loop presentation aspect The first animation data AD3 for B character for causing the B character CH9 for loop effect to perform the operation display corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect, and the operation display corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect by the second loop effect mode Second animation for B character to be played by B character CH9 for loop effect And Ndeta AD4, but are stored in advance.

  The animation data AD1 to AD4 are data for determining the coordinates of each vertex in object data for displaying the loop rendering A character CH8 and the loop rendering B character CH9. A plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in the respective animation data AD1 to AD4 so as to be sequential numbers, and coordinate data of each vertex in the corresponding object data is set in each of the pieces of pointer information. The pointer information is updated when advancing by one frame (when the image update timing is reached) in a situation where loop effects are being performed, and coordinate data to be referred to is updated in the following order as the pointer information is updated. It will be changed. In this case, the continuous coordinate data are set so as to perform operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect corresponding to the corresponding character for loop effect CH8, CH9.

  As described above, the first animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display a moving image for loop effect according to the first loop effect mode, and the second animation data for displaying a loop effect according to the second loop effect mode is provided. Animation data AD2, AD4 are provided. As described above, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided separately to correspond to moving images for loop effects according to each loop effect mode, thereby enabling repeated display of moving images for loop effects in each period at one time. It is possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read out. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read out at one time, it becomes possible to disperse the time required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

  Even when the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are simultaneously displayed to display a loop effect moving image in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are also displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. As a result, it is possible to separately handle animation data AD1 and AD3 for operating the loop effect A character CH8 and animation data AD2 and AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9.

  In the memory module 133, as shown in FIG. 47A, a blending table CT is provided as data for executing loop effects, in addition to the animation data AD1 to AD4. The blending table CT is data for determining the blending ratio of coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at each update timing of the interpolation display period.

  The compounding table CT will be described in detail with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 47 (b). In the combination table CT, pointer data set in one-to-one correspondence with all update timings included in the interpolation display period, and coordinate data based on the first animation data AD1, AD3 at the update timings corresponding to each pointer information. And the data of the mixture ratio of the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2, AD4 are set. Specifically, from the start timing to the end timing of the interpolation display period, the blending ratio of the coordinate data by the first animation data AD1, AD3 gradually decreases and the blending ratio of the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2, AD4 The compounding table CT is set such that is gradually increased. In this case, the blending of the coordinate table by the blending table CT is performed on the coordinate data of the final timing by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data of the start timing by the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Therefore, in the interpolation display period, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are displayed as moving images so as to gradually change from the display mode at the final timing of the first animation period to the display mode at the start timing of the second animation period.

  Next, how a loop effect is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 48 (a) shows a first animation period, and FIG. 48 (b) shows a timing at which a moving image for loop effect according to a first loop effect mode based on the first animation data AD1, AD3 is newly started. 48 (c) shows an interpolation display period, FIG. 48 (d) shows a second animation period, and FIG. 48 (e) shows a moving image for a loop effect according to a second loop presentation mode based on the second animation data AD2, AD4. Indicates the timing at which a new start is made.

  The first animation period is started as shown in FIG. 48 (a) at the timing of t1, and the first loop effect is produced as shown in FIG. 48 (b) at the timing of t1, t2 and t3. The display cycle of the moving image for the loop effect according to the aspect is newly started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48A, the first animation period is ended at the timing of t4 which is the timing of the end of the display circulation of the moving image for loop effect by the first loop effect mode started at the timing of t3. As shown in FIG. 48C, the interpolation display period is started. The interpolation display period continues until the timing of t5.

  The end of the interpolation display period at the timing of t5 starts a second animation period as shown in FIG. 48 (d). Then, at each of the timing t5, the timing t6, and the timing t7, display circulation of a moving image for loop effect according to the second loop effect mode is newly started as shown in FIG. 48 (e). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), the second animation period is ended at the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the display circulation of the moving image for loop effect according to the second loop effect mode started at the timing of t7 ends. Ru.

  Incidentally, the duration T2 of the interpolation display period is a period T1 required for the moving image for loop effect by the first loop effect mode to make one rotation in the first animation period, and a loop effect by the second loop effect mode in the second animation period It is set to be shorter than the period T3 required for the moving image for one rotation.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing loop effects will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing operation processing for a loop effect performed by the display CPU 131. The calculation processing for loop effect is executed in the calculation processing for effect in step S2209 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The calculation processing for the loop effect is started when the information about the loop effect is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is the first animation period (step S2401: YES), it is determined in step S2402 whether it is the start timing of the first animation period. If it is the start timing of the first animation period (step S2402: YES), the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the first animation data AD3 for the B character are read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2403). In the subsequent step S2404, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the loop rendering A character CH8 and the loop rendering B character CH9 is grasped. In the image data, object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and a loop effect B character CH9 The corresponding texture data is included. Thereafter, in step S2405, loop presentation start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that loop presentation should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2402 or if the process of step S2405 is executed, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2406). In the image data, object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and a loop effect B character CH9 The corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the first animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the update timing of this time in the first animation data AD1 for A character is read out, In the first animation data AD3 for B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the update timing of this time is read out. Then, the read coordinate data is written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132 and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. Update information for control. Thus, the loop effect A character CH8 can be operated according to the A character first animation data AD1, and the loop effect B character CH9 can be operated according to the B character first animation data AD3. It becomes possible.

  In the following step S2408, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop character for A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the secured area and the secured area in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2409, loop rendering specification information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a loop rendering execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If it is the interpolation display period (step S2401: NO, step S2410: YES), processing for the interpolation display period is executed in step S2411. In the processing for interpolation display period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether it is the interpolation display start timing on the preceding side.

  In the interpolation display period, as described above, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect A character CH8 mixes the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the second animation data AD2 for the A character at a predetermined ratio. The coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9 is derived by blending the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the second animation data AD4 for the B character at a predetermined ratio. It is derived. In this case, derivation of coordinate data by combination is not simultaneously started for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, but is derivation of coordinate data by the combination for the loop effect A character CH8. Is first started, and derivation of coordinate data by blending for the loop effect B character CH9 is started at the update timing of the next image.

  Such contents will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51 (a) shows the image update timing, FIG. 51 (b) shows the first animation period of the loop effect A character CH8, and FIG. 51 (c) shows the interpolation display period of the loop effect A character CH8. 51D shows the first animation period of the loop effect B character CH9, and FIG. 51E shows the interpolation display period of the loop effect B character CH9.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, the image update timing is obtained at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4. In this case, for the loop effect A character CH8, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 51 (b) and the interpolation display period starts as shown in FIG. 51 (c) at time t2. Ru. However, at the timing of the t2, the first animation period is continued for the loop effect B character CH9. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51D, as shown in FIG. 51D, the first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 as shown in FIG. The interpolation display period is started.

  Returning to the explanation of the processing for interpolation display period (FIG. 50), the start timing of the interpolation display period is the start timing of derivation of coordinate data by blending for the A character CH8 for loop effect. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, and the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. In step S 2503, the composition table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132.

  In the following step S2504, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. In the image data, object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and a loop effect B character CH9 The corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2505, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect A character CH8 is updated. In the updating process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for A character in the composition table CT Blend at the rate corresponding to the first pointer information. Specifically, coordinate data of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 and coordinate data of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 are blended at a ratio of 95: 5 between corresponding vertices. Then, the control data is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132.

  Thereafter, in step S2506, coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9 is updated. Specifically, in the first animation data AD3 for B character, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing is read out. Then, the control information is updated by writing the read coordinate data in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132. Here, also at the last update timing, that is, at the final timing of the first animation period, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for B character as coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9 Is used. Therefore, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect B character CH9 is not changed from the previous update timing.

  In the subsequent step S2507, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2504, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop character for A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the secured area and the secured area in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, loop rendering specification information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a loop rendering execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  When it is the update timing of the next image with respect to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2501: NO, step S2509: YES), the second animation data AD4 for B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2510). In step S 2511, the composition table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Here, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, as described above, the composition table CT to be applied to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character has already been read out to the work RAM 132 in step S2503. On the other hand, in order to apply the combination table CT for applying to animation data AD1 and AD2 for A character and the animation data AD3 and AD4 for B character by newly reading out the combination table CT in step S2511. The compounding table CT is separately read out to the work RAM 132. As a result, even if the composition of coordinate data using the compounding table CT is configured to be started with a delay of one update timing between the A character CH8 for loop effect and the B character CH9 for loop effect, the compound table It becomes possible to start blending the coordinate data from the proportion corresponding to the first pointer information by CT.

  In the subsequent step S 2512, the image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. In the image data, object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and a loop effect B character CH9 The corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the updating process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for A character are In the blending table CT corresponding to the character CH8, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control data is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for B character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for B character are used as the B character CH9 for loop effect. It mixes in the ratio corresponding to the present pointer information in corresponding | compatible compounding table CT. Then, the control data is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132.

  In the following step S2507, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop character for A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the secured area and the secured area in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, loop rendering specification information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a loop rendering execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If it is the interpolation display period and the update timing is later than the interpolation display start timing on the rear side (step S2501: NO, step S2509: NO), the process proceeds to step S2512 without executing the processing of step S2510 and step S2511. . In step S 2512, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the execution target table currently set. In the image data, object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and a loop effect B character CH9 The corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the updating process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for A character are In the blending table CT corresponding to the character CH8, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control data is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for B character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for B character are used as the B character CH9 for loop effect. It mixes in the ratio corresponding to the present pointer information in corresponding | compatible compounding table CT. Then, the control data is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132.

  In the following step S2507, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop character for A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the secured area and the secured area in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, loop rendering specification information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a loop rendering execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  Returning to the explanation of the calculation processing for loop effect (FIG. 49), if it is the second animation period (steps S2401 and S2410: NO), based on the currently set execution target table, it corresponds to the current update timing. The type of image data is grasped (step S2406). In the image data, object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and a loop effect B character CH9 The corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the second animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set in correspondence with the pointer information at the update timing of this time in the second animation data AD2 for A character is read out, In the second animation data AD4 for B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the update timing of this time is read out. Then, the read coordinate data is written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132 and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. Update information for control. Thus, the loop effect A character CH8 can be operated according to the A character second animation data AD2, and the loop effect B character CH9 can be operated according to the B character second animation data AD4. It becomes possible.

  In the following step S2408, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop character for A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the secured area and the secured area in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2409, loop rendering specification information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a loop rendering execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  As described above, when the calculation processing for loop effect is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes object data corresponding to the loop character for A character CH8, loop Information on usage instructions of texture data corresponding to the rendering A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop rendering B character CH9, and texture data corresponding to the loop rendering B character CH9 is set. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the image data is set including coordinate data of each vertex. Further, loop rendering specification information is set in the drawing list, and loop rendering start specification information is set at the start timing of the loop rendering.

  Next, setting processing for loop effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for loop effect is executed as a part of the setting process for effect performed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when loop rendering specification information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for loop rendering is performed.

  If the loop rendering start designation information is set in the current rendering list (step S 2601: YES), an object corresponding to the loop rendering A character CH 8 in the memory module 133 from the information of the address set in the rendering list The data, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the address at which the texture data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9 is stored are grasped and grasped Based on the result, the image data is read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S2602).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601 or if the process of step S2602 is executed, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped in step S2603. In step S2604, the coordinate data of each vertex in the world coordinate system for each of the object data for displaying the loop rendering A character CH8 and the object data for displaying the loop rendering B character CH9 It grasps from the drawing list, furthermore grasps the other parameter information of these object data and the corresponding texture data with step S2605. Then, in step S2606, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results of steps S2603 to S2605.

  By executing setting processing for loop effect as described above, the object data of A character CH8 for loop effect and the object data of B character CH9 for loop effect are arranged in the world coordinate system, and Coordinate data derived from the animation data AD1 to AD4 is applied as coordinate data of each vertex. Thereby, on the display surface P, the moving image display is performed so that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 operate in a mode corresponding to each of the first animation period, the interpolation display period, and the second animation period. It will be.

  The first animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display a movie for loop presentation according to the first loop presentation mode, and the second animation data AD2 is provided to display a movie for loop presentation according to the second loop presentation mode. , AD 4 are provided. As described above, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided separately to correspond to moving images for loop effects according to each loop effect mode, thereby enabling repeated display of moving images for loop effects in each period at one time. It is possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read out. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read out at one time, it becomes possible to disperse the time required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

  Even when the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are simultaneously displayed to display a loop effect moving image in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are also displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. As a result, it is possible to separately handle animation data AD1 and AD3 for operating the loop effect A character CH8 and animation data AD2 and AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9.

  The first animation data is between the first animation period in which the moving image for loop effect according to the first loop effect mode is displayed and the second animation period in which the moving image for loop effect according to the second loop effect mode is displayed An interpolation display period in which a moving image is displayed is set using coordinate data derived by blending the coordinate data by AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at a predetermined ratio. As a result, the first animation period starts from the first animation period without securing the continuity of the operation display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 between the first animation data AD1 and AD2 and the second animation data AD2 and AD4. It is possible to secure the continuity of the operation display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the transition to the period.

  The timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period starts, and the timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 and the interpolation display period starts It is set to be different update timing. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period from becoming extremely large.

  The first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 at the next image update timing with respect to the timing at which the first animation period ends for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period starts, and the interpolation is performed The display period starts. As a result, even when the start timing of the interpolation display period is different between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the second animation period is started in the loop effect A character CH8. Can start the second animation period in the loop effect B character CH9 early.

  The same blending table CT is used regardless of whether the interpolation display period for the loop effect A character CH8 or the interpolation display period for the loop effect B character CH9. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to execute the interpolation display period.

<Another form of the configuration concerning the loop effect>
-When a loop effect is executed, it is not limited to a configuration in which both the first animation period and the second animation period always occur. The first animation period occurs as the effect of the second animation period but does not occur as a second animation period after the first animation period as the effect of the reach display in the effect for the game cycle in the game round that results in the jackpot May occur. In this case, when only the first animation period occurs as a loop effect and when the second animation period occurs after the first animation period, animation data may be generated as the first animation data AD1 and AD3. It is preferable to distinguish between the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Then, in the configuration in which the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided for the first animation period and the second animation period as described above, the motion of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are smooth as in the above embodiment. It is preferable to set an interpolation display period in order to do so.

  -The first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 at the next image update timing with respect to the timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period starts The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the interpolation display period is started, and the first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 and the interpolation display period starts after a plurality of update timings with respect to the former timing. It may be configured as

  The start timing of the process for deriving coordinate data by blending the coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at a predetermined ratio is a loop effect A character CH8 and a loop In a configuration different from that for the B character for presentation CH9, an interpolation display period in which coordinate data derived by blending is used is simultaneously started for the loop character for A character for loop presentation CH8 and the B character for loop presentation B character CH9 It is good also as composition. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously start the operation of the interpolation display period in the appearance of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect character CH9 while dispersing the processing load.

<Another form of processing for interpolation display period>
In the above embodiment, the end timing of the first animation period is determined in advance, and the loop data is executed on the coordinate data of each vertex of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. In this configuration, the timing at which the first animation period ends can be varied, so that each vertex of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period can be changed. The coordinate data may be changed each time the loop effect is performed. The specific configuration in which the coordinate data of each vertex may vary as described above will be described in detail below.

  In the present embodiment, the effect operating device operated by the player is electrically connected to the sound emission control device 60, and it is sounded that the operation device for effect is operated during execution of the first animation period. When specified by the MPU 62, the corresponding command is transmitted to the display CPU 131, and when the display CPU 131 receives the command, the first animation period is ended and the second animation period is performed after the interpolation display period is executed. To start. Although the first animation period occurs as an effect of the reach display in the effect of the game turn, for example, in the game turn resulting in the configuration, the second animation period does not occur in the configuration, for example. When applied to a configuration in which the second animation period occurs after the first animation period as the effect of reach display in the occasional effect, the timing at which the operation device for effect is operated in the first animation period in the game turn that results in a big hit Accordingly, it is possible to change the start timing of the second animation period, which is a definite notification that the jackpot result will be made. In this case, it is possible to perform the finalization notification at the timing corresponding to the operation timing of the operation device for effect while using the loop effect.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the end timing of the first animation period may fluctuate, the operation mode of the loop effect A character CH8 and the operation mode of the loop effect B character CH9 also change at the end timing of the first animation period. obtain. Then, when the start timing of the interpolation display period is different update timing between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the operation mode of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. It is preferable to change the target which starts the interpolation display period first according to.

  Specifically, among the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the changing operation of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 between the end timing of the first animation period and the start timing of the second animation period. The operation amount at one update timing in the interpolation display period is larger in the larger amount side than in the smaller amount change operation amount side. In this case, it is preferable that the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side with a large amount of change movement have a larger image update timing in the interpolation display period. On the other hand, even if the start timing of the interpolation display period is different between the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9, the end timing of the interpolation display period is the same for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9. Since the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side where the end timing of the interpolation display period is late are smaller, the number of image update timings generated in the interpolation display period is smaller than that on the earlier side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interpolation display period is started earlier from the side with the larger amount of change movement among the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 in relation to the end timing of the first animation period. .

  The data for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 to be subjected to the interpolation display period first in relation to the end timing of the first animation period, in this embodiment, the memory module 133 is used to determine the first start target. The table PDT is stored in advance. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for describing the start target determination table PDT.

  In the table PDT for determining the start target, there are a range of the number of frames (number of times of image update timing) that can occur as the first animation period, and loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolation display period first. The correspondence with is predetermined. The correspondence relationship is the operation mode of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at each update timing of the first animation period in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 and each loop effect character CH8 and CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period. It is determined by comparing with the operation mode of. Specifically, the number of frames in the first animation period is 0th frame (frame of start timing) to 49th frame, 100th frame to 149th frame and 200th frame to 249th frame on the start start side. A loop effect B character CH9 is set as the character. On the other hand, for the 50th to 99th frames, the 150th to 199th frames, and the 250th to 299th frames (final timing frames) in the first animation period, the character is looped as the character on the start side. An effect A character CH8 is set.

  The processing configuration for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is to be started earlier by using the destination start target determination table PDT will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the interpolation display period process executed by the display CPU 72. The processing for interpolation display period is performed after the operation device for effect is operated in the middle of the first animation period or after the final timing of the first animation period, and until the end timing of the interpolation display period is reached, Every time the operation processing for loop effect (FIG. 49) is activated.

  If it is the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S 2701: YES), the table PDT for determining the start target is read from the memory module 133, and the current frame number of the first animation period is the character of the start start side for loop presentation A It is determined whether the number of frames corresponding to the character CH8 corresponds or not (step S2702). If it corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the start start side is the loop effect A character CH 8 (step S 2702: YES), the second animation data AD 2 for the A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S 2703). ). On the other hand, if it corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the first start side is the B character CH9 for loop effect (step S2702: NO), the second animation data AD4 for B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 ( Step S2704). When the process of step S2703 is performed or the process of step S2704 is performed, the mixing table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 in step S2705.

  In the following step S2706, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Thereafter, in step S2707, coordinate data update processing in accordance with the combination table CT is executed for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that have started to cause the interpolation display period to start earlier. Also, in step S2708, for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period has not been started earlier, the same coordinate data as the coordinate data at the immediately preceding update timing is grasped. Thereafter, in step S2709, update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, loop effect designation information is stored. The processing contents of these steps S2706 to S2710 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2504 to S2508 of the processing for interpolation display period (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

  When it is the update timing of the next image with respect to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2701: NO, step S2711: YES), loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 which did not become the side to start the interpolation display period first. The second animation data AD2 and AD4 corresponding to are read out from the memory module 133 into the work RAM 132 (step S2712). Specifically, when the process of step S2703 is executed at the processing time of the processing for interpolation display period immediately before, the second animation data AD4 for B character is read, and the processing of processing for interpolation display period immediately before If the process of step S2704 has been executed at once, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read out. Thereafter, in step S2713, the composition table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132.

  In the following step S2714, the image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Thereafter, in step S2715, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Thereafter, in step S2709, update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, loop effect designation information is stored. The processing contents of steps S2709 to S2710 and steps S2714 to S2715 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2507 to S2508 and steps S2512 to S2513 of the processing for interpolation display period (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment. . Further, the processing contents in the case of making a negative determination in step S 2711 are the same as the processing contents in the case of making a negative determination in step S 2509 of the processing for interpolation display period (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

  According to this embodiment, the type of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9, which are targets for which the interpolation display period starts earlier, are in accordance with the operation mode of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. Since the change is made, it is possible not only to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period, but also to perform interpolation display in a mode according to the end timing of the first animation period. Therefore, even if the end timing of the first animation period is variable, the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period is reduced while the interpolation display of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 can be smoothly performed. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the type corresponding to the end timing of the first animation period of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is to be started earlier is previously set as the table PDT for determining the start target, the interpolation display is performed. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load in the case of determining the type of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 which are targets for which the period starts earlier.

<Another form of processing for interpolation display period>
The type of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9, which are targets for starting the interpolation display period first, is not limited to the configuration set in advance as the table PDT for determining the start target, for example, the first animation period From the coordinate data of each vertex of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the end timing and the coordinate data of each vertex of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period, the end of the first animation period The amount of movement of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 from the timing to the start timing of the second animation period is derived by calculation, and the loop effect character CH8 and CH9 on the side with the large amount of movement derived is interpolated display period first May be started.

  The amount of movement is small instead of a configuration in which the interpolation display period is started earlier from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side having a large amount of movement from the end timing of the first animation period to the start timing of the second animation period. The interpolation display period may be started earlier from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side.

<Configuration for performing bone model display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 55 (a) and FIG. 55 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of bone model display.

  In the bone model display, a bone display character CH10 expressing a person or the like as shown in FIG. 55 (a) is displayed in 3D as a plurality of bones as object data as shown in FIG. 55 (b). The display contents use skeletal data FRD1 having data BOD and a plurality of joint data JOD, and skin data SKD1 set in association with skeletal data FRD1 and representing a portion of skin. The bone data BOD corresponds to the bone portion of the bone display character CH10, and the joint data JOD corresponds to the joint portion connecting a plurality of bone data BOD. Therefore, by changing the coordinate data and orientation data of bone data BOD while using joint data JOD as a reference, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD in skin data SKD1 set in association with skeleton data FRD1 is changed. Accordingly, the form of the bone display character CH10 is changed. In FIG. 55 (b), part of the skin data is omitted.

  The relationship between parent and child is set to a plurality of bone data BOD, and when the parent object bone data BOD is moved, the parent object bone data BOD follows the child object relationship. A certain bone data BOD will move. In the bone display character CH10, the bone data corresponding to the spine portion is set as the main parent object bone data BOD as the top parent object, and the joint data JOD is applied to the main parent object bone data BOD. The connected bone data BOD all correspond to the child object bone data BOD. Further, in the bone data BOD of the child object, between the bone data BOD arranged in a line from the bone data BOD of the main parent object, the bone data BOD on the side closer to the connection is closer to the bone data BOD of the main parent object. It becomes a relation of parent object to bone data BOD. Therefore, when the main parent target bone data BOD is moved, the other bone data BOD is also moved according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1. Further, even when the main parent target bone data BOD does not move, the main target bone data BOD among the plurality of bone data BODs arranged in a line from the main parent target bone data BOD moves. On the other hand, bone data BOD in a child object relationship is also moved according to predetermined bone weighting data BWD1.

  The skin data SKD1 has many vertex data TD, one polygon is defined by three or four vertex data TD, and the skin data SKD1 is expressed by many polygons. Each vertex data TD is associated with one or more bone data BOD in accordance with the skin weighting data SWD1. Thereby, when the bone data BOD moves, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD is changed according to the skin weighting data SWD1, and accordingly, the skin data SKD1 is deformed, and finally the mode according to the operation of the bone data BOD While the bone display character CH10 operates, the skin portion of the bone display character CH10 is deformed.

  In the bone model display effect, a plurality of bone display characters are displayed including the bone display character CH10. A data configuration for executing the bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration for performing bone model display.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the memory module 133 stores a plurality of bone display characters including the skeleton data FRD1 of the bone display character CH10 as an area for storing image data for performing bone model display. Skin data storage area 161 in which skeletal data corresponding to the bone is stored in advance and skin data storage in which skin data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the skin data SKD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance An area 162 and a texture data storage area 163 in which texture data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the texture data BTD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance are provided. Skeletal data and skin data are as described above. The texture data BTD1 is data for determining color information of the bone display character CH10, and the color information is determined in relation to the vertex data of the skin data SKD1. Therefore, the bone display character CH10 can be displayed by applying the skin data SKD1 to the skeleton data FRD1 and then applying the texture data BTD1. These skeletal data FRD1, skin data SKD1 and texture data BTD1 are used by the VDP 135.

  The memory module 133 stores control data in addition to image data as data for performing bone model display. A bone weighting data storage area 164 in which bone weighting data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the bone weighting data BWD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance as an area for storing the control data. And a skin weighting data storage area 165 in which skin weighting data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the skin weighting data SWD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance, and a bone animation of the bone display character CH10 A bone animation data storage area 166 in which bone animation data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including data BAD1 is stored in advance is provided.

  The bone weighting data BWD1 defines the relationship between the parent object and the child object in the plurality of bone data BOD included in the skeleton data FRD1 and moves the movement amount when the parent object bone data BOD is moved to the child object bone data BOD. Determine the proportion of the case of reflection. The skin weighting data SWD1 defines the correspondence between the bone data BOD and each vertex data of the skin data SKD1, and also defines the ratio in the case where the movement amount when the bone data BOD is moved is reflected on each vertex data.

  The bone animation data BAD1 is data for determining the coordinates of the bone data BOD at each update timing so that the bone display character CH10 performs a predetermined operation over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in the bone animation data BAD1 so as to be sequential numbers, and for each piece of pointer information, for each piece of bone data BOD to be moved and set, this time from the previous coordinate data Difference data is set. In this case, difference data is set for only the bone data BOD that is necessary to determine the rough movement of the bone display character CH10 as bone data BOD to be set as the difference data, and the remaining data For bone data BOD, coordinate data is determined according to bone weighting data BWD1. Further, even in the case of bone data BOD for which difference data is to be set, when there is a child target relationship with other bone data BOD, not only difference data defined by bone animation data BAD1 but also bone data BOD. Coordinate data is determined in accordance with coordinate data of bone data BOD as a parent object and bone weighting data BWD1.

  Here, when displaying each bone display character CH10, coordinate data of each bone data BOD of the corresponding skeleton data FRD1 is determined by calculation. A plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set in the skeleton data FRD1 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57 (a). Specifically, 50 pieces of bone data of first to 50th bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set. Each of the bone display characters CH10 displayed in the bone model display effect includes a plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 within the range of at most 50 pieces. As an area for calculating the coordinate data of the bone data BOD1 to BOD50, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57 (b), a work area for coordinate calculation 169 is provided in the work RAM 132. The coordinate calculation area 169 is provided with 50 unit calculation areas corresponding to the maximum number of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 of the bone display character CH10. Addresses (first to 50th addresses) are set.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing a bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for producing a bone model display performed by the display CPU 131. The computation process for producing a bone model display effect is executed in the effect computation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The computation process for the bone model display effect is started when information about the bone model display effect is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is the start timing of the bone model display effect (step S 2801: YES), the control data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed in the present bone model display effect are processed from the memory module 133 It reads out to RAM132. Specifically, bone weighting data, skin weighting data, and bone animation data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed are read out (step S2802). In the following step S2803, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying each of the plurality of bone display characters is grasped. The image data includes skeletal data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters. Thereafter, in step S 2804, start designation information of bone model display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the bone model display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2801 or if the process of step S2804 is executed, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2805). The image data includes skeletal data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters.

  Thereafter, in step S2806, a value corresponding to the number of bone display characters to be displayed this time is set in the bone model number counter provided in the work RAM 132. In the subsequent step S2807, a process of setting the unit bone number counter provided in the work RAM 132 is executed. In the setting process to the unit bone number counter, the number of bone data included in the bone data of the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter is set to the unit bone number counter.

  Thereafter, in step S2808, each unit calculation area included in the coordinate calculation area 169 of the work RAM 132 is cleared to "0". In the subsequent step S2809, the coordinate data set at the previous update timing of each bone data in the bone display character targeted for the coordinate calculation at this time is read from the area secured corresponding to the bone display character. , And set in the corresponding unit calculation areas of the coordinate calculation area 169.

  Thereafter, in step S2810, coordinate calculation processing is performed. The coordinate calculation process is performed on all bone data corresponding to the bone display character that is the target of the current coordinate calculation, but the order of execution is that the bone data of the main parent object is first, and thereafter the parent is the parent The bone data with higher priority as the target is performed in order. Thereby, the coordinate data of the bone data of the main parent object is calculated first, and thereafter, coordinate data is calculated sequentially from the bone data of the parent object closer to the bone data of the main parent object, and finally the last child object of the end Coordinate data of bone data of is calculated.

  Coordinate calculation processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. If the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter is not the main parent target bone data (step S2901: NO), in step S2902, the bone data having a parent object relationship to the current bone data The coordinate data newly calculated for the current update timing and the coordinate data set at the previous update timing (ie, written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target in the coordinate calculation area 169) Calculation of the difference data from the coordinate data), and the bone of the current calculation target from the calculated difference data and the bone weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter Calculate difference data of coordinate data to be applied to dataThen, the coordinate data at the previous update timing in the bone data of the current calculation target (that is, the coordinate data written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target in the coordinate calculation area 169) New coordinate data is calculated by applying to. The calculated coordinate data is written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target in the coordinate calculation area 169.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901 or the process of step S2902 is performed, the current calculation is performed on bone animation data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter in step S2903. It is determined whether or not difference data is set for the target bone data. If difference data is set (step S2903: YES), in step S2904, the unit sets the difference data set in the bone animation data in the coordinate calculation area 169 corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target The present invention is applied to coordinate data written in the calculation area, and the coordinate data after the application is written in the unit calculation area.

  Returning to the explanation of the calculation process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 58), after executing the coordinate calculation process in step S2810, the value of the unit bone number counter of the work RAM 132 is decremented by 1 in step S2811. If the value of the unit bone number counter after the one subtraction is 1 or more (step S2812: NO), the coordinate calculation process (step S2810) is executed on the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter.

  If the value of the unit bone number counter is "0" (step S2812: YES), it means that the coordinate calculation processing of all bone data has been completed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. Do. In this case, coordinate data update processing is executed in step S2813. In the coordinate data update process, coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing written in the unit calculation area of the coordinate calculation area 169 is made to correspond to the bone display character which is the target of the current calculation in the work RAM 132. Write in the area secured by

  In the following step S2814, coordinate calculation processing of skin data is executed. In coordinate calculation processing of the skin data, while referring to the skin weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, it is made correspond to the coordinate data of each bone data of the bone display character Coordinate data of each vertex data of skin data is calculated. Then, the coordinate data is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence to the bone display character as the current calculation target.

  In the subsequent step S2815, for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, parameter data other than the coordinate data of bone data and the coordinate data of skin data are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is In the work RAM 132, the data is written in the area secured corresponding to the bone display character which is the target of the current calculation.

  Thereafter, in step S2816, the value of the bone model number counter in the work RAM 132 is decremented by one. If the value of the bone model number counter after the one subtraction is 1 or more (step S2817: NO), the process of step S2807 to step S2816 is executed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. . If the value of the bone model number counter is “0” (step S2817: YES), in step S2818, designation information of bone model display effect for causing VDP 135 to recognize that it is an execution period of the bone model display effect It is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  As described above, when the calculation process for producing bone model display is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed. Information on usage instructions of corresponding skeletal data, skin data and texture data is set. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to each image data is set including coordinate data of bone data of each bone display character and coordinate data of each vertex data of skin data. Further, designation information of bone model display effect is set in the drawing list, and further, start designation information of bone model display effect is set at the start timing of the bone model display effect.

  Next, the setting process for producing a bone model display performed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the bone model display effect is executed as a part of the setting process for the effect performed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the designation information of the bone model display effect is set in the drawing list, setting processing for the bone model display effect is executed.

  When start designation information of bone model display effect is set in the current drawing list (step S3001: YES), the memory module 133 becomes the current display target based on the information of the address set in the drawing list. It grasps the address of the area where skeletal data, skin data and texture data are stored corresponding to a plurality of bone display characters, and based on the grasp result, the memory module 133 transfers these image data to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. Read out (step S3002).

  If a negative determination is made in step S3001 or if the process of step S3002 is executed, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped in step S3003. Further, in step S3004, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each bone data corresponding to each of the bone display characters to be displayed is grasped from the current drawing list, and in step S3005 Coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each vertex data of skin data corresponding to each of the displayed bone display characters is grasped from the current drawing list, and in step S3006 each bone display to be displayed The other parameter information about the character is grasped from the current drawing list. Then, in step S3007, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results of step S3003 to step S3006.

  By executing the setting process for producing bone model display as described above, skeletal data and skin data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed this time are arranged in the world coordinate system. And coordinate data derived using bone weighting data, skin weighting data and bone animation data as coordinate data of each bone data and skin data. As a result, on the display surface P, moving image display is performed so that a plurality of bone display characters operate.

<Description of Set Unit Characters CHG1 to CHG5>
Here, a group character group CHG is set as one type of bone display character. FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the group character group CHG.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the set character group CHG includes a plurality of (specifically, five) set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 includes set skeleton data FRD2 having a plurality of bone data ABD and a plurality of joint data AJD, a set skin data SKD2, and a set It is displayed using the texture data BTD2. The predetermined coordinate data is set by executing the calculation process (FIG. 58) for bone model display effect and the setting process (FIG. 60) for bone model display effect described above for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. The collective skin data SKD2 are applied to the collective skeleton data FRD2, and 3D display of the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is performed in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 61 (b). Then, drawing is performed while applying the set texture data BTD2 thereto, and image display of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is performed on the display surface P as shown in FIG. 61 (a). The data FRD2, SKD2 and BTD2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG.

  Each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed in such a manner that the player recognizes that the characters have the same shape, pattern and size as shown in FIG. 61 (a). For example, in a situation where the bone display character CH10 is displayed on the display surface P so that the bone display character CH10 performs a predetermined operation, the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 perform a specific operation around the bone display character CH10. Displayed on the display surface P. In this case, while an operation display indicating a gaining expectation such as a jackpot result is performed in the bone display character CH10, an operation display indicating such a rating is a row for the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. I can not do it. Then, the player pays attention to the bone display character CH10 when the bone model display effect is executed. Under such circumstances, the bone display character CH10 requires a fine movement, whereas each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 does not require a fine movement. Therefore, the number of bone data ABD of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is set smaller than the number of bone data BOD of bone display character CH10, and it is necessary to display each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. A device for reducing the amount of data and a device for reducing the processing load for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are provided.

  Hereinafter, the data configuration for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 will be described in detail. FIG. 62 is an explanatory view for explaining frame data FRD2 of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c) are the bone display character CH10 and the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. It is an explanatory view for comparing each data volume.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the number of bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, the bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3. The number, the number of bone data ABD 31 to ABD 40 of the fourth set unit character CHG 4, and the number of bone data ABD 41 to ABD 50 of the fifth set unit character CHG 5 are all 10, and all the set unit characters CHG 1 to CHG 5 The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is 50 in total. The bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2.

  The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is the same as the total number of bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a-1) and 63 (a-2), only one character, bone display character CH10, is displayed by the skeleton data FRD1, and the first to fifth by the set skeleton data FRD2. The skeleton data FRD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 and the set skeleton data for displaying the collection unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 although the five characters of the collection unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 can be displayed. The amount of data is the same as or substantially the same as that of FRD2. In this case, it is possible to reduce the data capacity as compared with the configuration in which the bone data of the same number as the bone display character CH10 is set in correspondence with each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Although each of the skeleton data FRD1 and FRD2 is accompanied by the header data referred to by the VDP 135, the skeleton data is not set individually for each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, but one set skeleton By aggregating as data FRD2, such accompanying data can be reduced.

  The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is 50, and the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are collectively set to one set skeleton data FRD2 for bone display effect In the calculation process (FIG. 58), calculation of coordinate data of each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is performed collectively in the same manner as the bone data of one bone display character.

  More specifically, in the calculation process for bone display effect (FIG. 58), as described above, coordinate data of each bone data is derived by calculation, but this calculation is included in one skeleton data The bone data are collectively read and collectively processed (steps S2808 to S2813). Then, in this calculation process, although the coordinate calculation area 169 provided in the work RAM 132 is used, a unit capable of storing data for calculating coordinate data of each bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169 The number of calculation areas is 50. On the other hand, bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are set to be aggregated into one set skeleton data FRD2 as described above, and the total number of bone data ABD1 to ADB50 is a coordinate. It is equal to or less than the total number of unit calculation areas in the calculation area 169. Therefore, in the case of calculating coordinate data of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, it is possible to read out the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 at one time and execute arithmetic processing. Therefore, data is read individually for each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and after calculation of coordinate data of bone data for one of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is completed, for the next one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which coordinate data of bone data is calculated.

  In the configuration in which each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the aggregation unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is set to be aggregated into one set skeleton data FRD2, a character having a different relation between a parent object and a child object of each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 It is set between. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same, and further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 Since the arrangement modes of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 in are identical to each other, the skeletons of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 have the same shape and the same size. In this case, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 included in the same groups G1 to G10 in FIG. 62 correspond to the skeleton part at the same position in each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. For example, the first bone data ABD1, the eleventh bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31, and the 41st bone data ABD41 included in the first group G1 correspond to the corresponding set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, respectively. The 10th bone data ABD10, the 20th bone data ABD20, the 30th bone data ABD30, the 40th bone data ABD40, and the 50th bone data ABD50 included in the tenth group G10 correspond to the skeleton of the head, respectively. Corresponds to the skeleton of the right foot in the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

  In each of the groups G1 to G10, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 is set in a parent target relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 There is. For example, in the first group G1, the first bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1 is the eleventh bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. And the forty-first bone data ABD 41 are set to a parent target relationship.

  On the other hand, the relationship between the parent object and the child object in any one of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the same set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 and between the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of different set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Is not set. For example, the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set among the first to tenth bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. Also, for example, parent object and child object between the eleventh bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31 and the 41st bone data ABD41 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 in the first group G1. The relationship with is not set.

  In the configuration in which the relationship between the parent object and the child object is set as described above, the bone weighting data for aggregation BWD2 (see FIG. 56) stored in the memory module 133 is bone data ABD1 of the first aggregation unit character CHG1. When difference data of coordinate data is applied to any of ABD10, the other set unit characters CHG2 included in the same groups G1 to G10 as the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 to which the difference data is applied are included. It is set to be applied as it is to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of CHG5. Therefore, when the first set unit character CHG1 moves, the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 follow it.

  On the other hand, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, one bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 has moved However, other bone data ABD1 to ABD10 will not move following it. The same applies to the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. Further, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, for example, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2 Even if the third character moves, the bone data ABD 31 to ABD 50 of the third to fifth set unit characters CHG 3 to CHG 5 do not move following it. As a matter of course, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 have a parent target relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD 20 of the second set unit character CHG2, so that the second set unit character CHG2 is Even if the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 move, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 does not move following it.

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are referred to for the operation content of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 when the set bone animation data BAD2 for operating each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 and the set bone animation data BAD2 are used. While explaining. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the set bone animation data BAD2, and FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation content of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the set bone animation data BAD2, pointer information corresponding to one update timing of the image is set, and difference data is set corresponding to each pointer information. For pointer information of “0” to “m”, difference data is set only for bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. The difference data corresponds to data to be moved in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1.

  In a period in which such difference data is set, each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 65 (a). Specifically, at the initial display position of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-1), it is determined in a state that each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 has the same shape. It is lined up at equal intervals in the direction. In this case, when the difference data set in the pointer information “0” to “m” is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the difference data is not changed as it is. As applied to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit character CHG2 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 maintains its shape and interval in one direction in one direction. Moving.

  Returning to the description of the set of bone animation data BAD2 shown in FIG. 64, the pointer information of “m + 1” to “n” is not only for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 but also Difference data is also set for the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth aggregation unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. These difference data correspond to data to be moved in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1, and the shapes of the second set unit character CHG2 and the fourth set unit character CHG4 are maintained. The above one direction corresponds to the data to be moved in the opposite direction, and the third set unit character CHG3 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 correspond to the data to change the shape.

  In a period in which such difference data is set, each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 65 (b). Specifically, from the state where each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (b-1), the first to fifth set unit characters as shown in FIG. 65 (b-2) The distance between the second set unit character CHG2 and the third set unit character CHG3 and the distance between the fourth set unit character CHG4 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 while moving in one direction as a whole of CHG1 to CHG5. Becomes short, and the shapes of the third set unit character CHG3 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 are changed.

  Next, the data amount of the skin data for collection SKD2 and the texture data for collection BTD2 will be described.

  For the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, common set skin data SKD2 is set, and common set texture data BTD2 is set. That is, the set skin data SKD2 is set as data to be applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Furthermore, the skin data for collection SKD2 is set as data to be applied to ten bone data. When the skin data for collection SKD2 is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the first skin data for collection SKD2 read from the memory module 133 is The first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are applied to each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50.

  The coordinate data of each vertex data ATD of the set skin data SKD2 for performing the application is determined by referring to the set skin weighting data SWD2 stored in the memory module 133. In the collective skin weighting data SWD2, the correspondence between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first collective unit character CHG1 and the collective skin data SKD2 and the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second collective unit character CHG2 and the collective skin data SKD2 , The correspondence between the bone data ABD 21 to ABD 30 of the third set unit character CHG 3 and the skin data SKD 2 for collection, the correspondence relation between the bone data ABD 31 to ABD 40 of the fourth set unit character CHG 4 and the collection skin data SKD 2 The correspondence between the bone data ABD 41 to ABD 50 of the fifth set unit character CHG 5 and the skin data for collection SKD 2 is set.

  In the configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2, the bone data for the set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 for the set skin data SKD2 is set. By setting as data applied to ABD1 to ABD 50, as shown in FIG. 63 (b-1) and FIG. 63 (b-2), skin data SKD1 for displaying bone display character CH10 is used. In contrast, the group skin data SKD2 has a data volume of 1/5.

  Similarly, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data to be applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 for the set texture data BTD2. When the texture data for aggregation BTD2 is applied to display the aggregation unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the texture data BTD2 for one aggregation read out from the memory module 133 is the first to fifth aggregation unit characters It applies to each of CHG1 to CHG5. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 63C-1 and 63C-2, the texture data for aggregation BTD2 is 1/5 of the texture data BTD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10. It is the amount of data.

  In calculation processing for bone model display effect (FIG. 58), when calculating coordinate data of bone data of a plurality of bone display characters, coordinate calculation of work RAM 132 is performed on data corresponding to bone data included in one skeleton data. After the calculation of the coordinate data is completed for the bone data, the coordinate data of the bone data is calculated for the next skeleton data. As a result, calculation of coordinate data is performed in units of one skeleton data, and various settings for calculating coordinate data of bone data included in one skeleton data are executed in a plurality of times. In comparison, it is possible to reduce the processing load in that the number of times of execution of the processing of step S2808 and step S2809 can be suppressed.

  The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is suppressed to a small number with respect to a plurality of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 which do not require fine motion control, and the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is one. It is aggregated and set in the set skeleton data FRD2. Thus, when calculating coordinate data of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of a plurality of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, coordinate calculation of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 can be performed collectively, and set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 The processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which various settings for calculating coordinate data are performed each time.

  In the configuration in which bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are collectively set to one set skeleton data FRD2, bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are the second to fifth sets The parent data are set for the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. As a result, all of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are integrally moved simply by setting coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 in the set bone animation data BAD2. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to integrally move the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 while suppressing the data amount of the set bone animation data BAD2 small. On the other hand, it is possible to adjust the coordinate data of the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of each child object while preventing the coordinate data of the parent bone data ABD1 to ABD10 from being affected. Thus, it is possible to integrally move all of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 simply by setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 as described above. Accordingly, the display positions of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 can be individually changed.

  The group skin data SKD2 is set as data to be applied to one group of unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and the same group skin data SKD2 is applied to each group of unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to store skin data in advance. Similarly, set texture data BTD2 is set as data to be applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the same set texture data BTD2 is applied to each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Ru. This makes it possible to reduce the data volume required to store texture data in advance.

<Another form of configuration concerning bone model display effect>
The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller or larger than the total number of bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10. The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller than the number of unit calculation areas of the coordinate calculation area 169.

  The relationship between the parent object and the child object may be set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. In this case, the operation of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 can be more realistically represented.

  The relationship between the parent target and the child target may be set between the bone data included in the first skeleton data and the bone data included in the second skeleton data. In this case, when one of the character displayed by the first skeleton data and the character displayed by the second skeleton data is moved, the other character can be moved following the movement. .

  The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 and the arrangement mode are not limited to the same configuration in each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and at least one of the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 and the arrangement mode is different. However, the number and arrangement may be substantially the same.

  The parameter information calculated collectively for a plurality of individual images after setting to the pre-derivation state in step S2808 and step S2809 in the arithmetic processing (FIG. 58) for displaying bone models in the display CPU 131 is skeleton data coordinate data And may be other parameter information such as rotation angle, scale, light information, and camera information.

<Configuration for performing plane shadow display>
Next, a configuration for performing plane shadow display will be described. FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the plane shadow display. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration of the memory module 133 necessary to perform plane shadow display.

  In the plane shadow display, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the effect character CH11, which is recognized by the player as a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both feet, is walking This is display content for displaying a shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 with respect to the ground image BG representing the ground in a situation where the moving image display moving in motion is being performed. The display content of the shadow image CH12 changes in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), a shadow image CH12 of a shape corresponding to that is displayed on the display content in which the effect character CH11 has the left arm in front and the right arm in the rear, and FIG. In the display content in which the effect character CH11 takes out the right arm in front and takes out the left arm as shown in), a shadow image CH12 of a shape corresponding to that is displayed.

  As image data for displaying the effect character CH11, as shown in FIG. 67, the memory module 133 stores character object data COD and character texture data CTD in advance. Further, as image data for displaying the ground image BG, the memory module 133 stores in advance ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD. In addition, as image data for displaying the shadow image CH12, the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD and the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  When displaying the shadow image CH12, character object data COD for displaying the rendering character CH11 by the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD in the world coordinate system and ground object data BGD for displaying the ground image BG. Placed between The flat shadow plate-like object data BSD is configured as a flat shape having no thickness and is object data having a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface as compared with a normal object having a thickness for displaying a character such as a person. is there. The flat shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 are applied to the flat shadow plate-like object data BSD, whereby the shadow image CH12 is displayed.

  The planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is disposed at a position spaced upward by a distance X (specifically, one pixel) above the ground object data BGD in the world coordinate system, and the planar shadow plate shape Character object data COD is arranged above object data BSD. Thus, by arranging the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD at a position spaced above the ground object data BGD, the shadow image CH12 is reliably displayed above the ground image BG. More than one type of texture data for plane shadows BST1 and BST2 are set. Specifically, texture data for first plane shadow BST1 for displaying a shadow image CH12 of the shape shown in FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. The second plane shadow texture data BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 of the shape shown in b) is set.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing plane shadow display will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for flat shadow display which is executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for flat shadow display is executed in the effect processing of step S2209 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The calculation processing for flat shadow display is started when information on flat shadow display is set in the execution target table currently set.

  When it is the start timing of flat shadow display (step S3101: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing flat shadow display is grasped (step S3102). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1, and second The plane shadow texture data BST2 is included. Thereafter, in step S3103, start designation information of flat shadow display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that flat shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3101 or if the process of step S3103 is executed, ground object data BGD and ground are used as data of this use target based on the currently set execution target table in step S3104. Grasp texture data BGTD. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3105). In this case, coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

  In step S3106, character object data COD and character texture data CTD are grasped as data to be used this time, based on the currently set execution target table. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data COD and CTD (Step S3107). In this case, the character is displayed as if the effect character CH11 is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66 (b). Coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S3108, the flat-plate object data BSD for plane shadows is grasped as data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In the following step S3109, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first shadow display period. The first shadow display period is a period in which the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used as texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12, and the second shadow display period is texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12. This is a period during which the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is used. If it is the first shadow display period (step S3109: YES), the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is grasped at step S3110, and if it is the second shadow display period (step S3109: NO), it is at step S3111. The second plane shadow texture data BST2 is grasped.

  The first shadow display period and the second shadow display period are image data for displaying the shadow image CH12 when the effect character CH11 is in the first display mode as shown in FIG. 66 (a). In order to display the shadow image CH12 when the texture data BST1 for the first plane shadow corresponding to the first display mode is used and the effect character CH11 is in the second display mode as shown in FIG. 66 (b) The second plane shadow texture data BST2 corresponding to the second display mode is set to be used as the second image data. That is, when the display character is alternately switched between the first display mode and the second display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move, it is used according to the switching of the display mode. The plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are switched.

  When the process of step S3110 is executed or when the process of step S3111 is executed, parameter information is added to the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD and the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 to be used at this time in step S3112. The parameter information derived by calculation is derived and written in the area secured corresponding to the image data BSD, BST1 and BST2 in the work RAM 132. Thereafter, in step S3113, flat shadow display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a flat shadow display execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  In this case, the shadow image CH12 may be displayed below the effect character CH11 as shown in FIG. 66 (a) and FIG. 66 (b) as coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD. As possible, coordinate data corresponding to coordinate data of the character object data COD grasped in step S3107 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the ground grasped in step S3105 so that the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the ground image BG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD.

  Here, as described above, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, but the application position is determined using the UV coordinate data. In detail, base UV coordinate data is set in the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD, and UV coordinate data is set in the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2. Then, the color information of the texture data for flat shadows BST1 and BST2 is applied such that the UV coordinate data of the texture data for flat shadows BST1 and BST2 correspond to the base UV coordinate data of the flat object texture BSD for flat shadows. In this case, since the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2, the UV coordinate data can not be changed in the display CPU 131. On the other hand, although the base UV coordinate data of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD can be changed in the display CPU 131, the base UV coordinate data is not changed in the execution period of the plane shadow display. For example, the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data are constant in any of the first shadow display period and the second shadow display period. Thereby, even if the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move and the coordinate data of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is changed accordingly, the plane shadow at each pixel of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD The application target of the texture data BST1 and BST2 is not changed.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for plane shadow display is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, and the like. Information on usage instructions of the ground object data BGD, the ground texture data BGTD, and the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is set, and the use instruction of the first plane shadow texture data BST1 in the first shadow display period Is set, and if it is the second shadow display period, the information of the use instruction of the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is set. Further, parameter information to be applied to each of the image data is set in the drawing list. Also, flat shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and furthermore, start designation information of flat shadow display is set at the start timing of flat shadow display.

  Next, the setting processing for flat shadow display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for flat shadow display is executed as a part of the setting process for effect performed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for plane shadow display is executed.

  When start designation information of plane shadow display is set in the current drawing list (step S3201: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target based on the information of the address set in the drawing list. The addresses at which the various image data are stored are grasped, and the various image data are read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasping results (step S3202). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1, and second The plane shadow texture data BST2 is included.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or if the process of step S3202 is executed, ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list in step S3203. . Also, in step S3204, the parameter information of the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information is grasped including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD.

  Thereafter, in step S3205, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. In step S3206, the parameter information of the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, in order to be displayed as if the effect character CH11 is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66 (b). The various parameter information is grasped including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD for characters.

  After that, in step S3207, the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Also, in step S3208, the coordinate data of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the coordinates in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD for displaying the shadow image CH12 below the effect character CH11. Understand the data. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the ground grasped in step S3204 so that the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the ground image BG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD. In step S3209, parameter information other than the coordinate data is grasped based on the drawing list of this time for the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD. In this case, fixed base UV coordinate data applied to the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped based on the drawing list.

  After that, in step S3210, planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 corresponding to the current shadow display period are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3211, fixed UV coordinate data applied to the texture data for plane shadows BST1 and BST2 is grasped from the texture data BST1 and BST2. In step S3212, parameter information other than the UV coordinate data applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is grasped based on the current drawing list.

  Thereafter, in step S3213, processing for setting the world coordinate system is executed in accordance with the contents corresponding to the grasped results in steps S3203 to S3212.

  By executing the setting process for displaying the plane shadow as described above, the ground object data BGD, the character object data COD, and the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131 Various parameter information is applied to each of the object data BGD, COD, BSD, including coordinate data derived by calculation in. Further, corresponding texture data BGTD, CTD, BST1, BST2 are applied to the object data BGD, COD, BSD. Thereby, on the display surface P, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), a moving image display is performed such that the effect character CH11 is walking and moving on the ground image BG. A moving image display is performed such that the shadow image CH12 follows while being deformed in accordance with the movement of the character CH11.

  As described above, when displaying the shadow image CH12 so as to follow the effect character CH11, the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged below the character object data COD and the plane shadow plate-like object The texture data BST1 and BST2 for plane shadows are applied to the data BSD. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the display of the shadow image is performed by calculation in relation to the light source data. In addition, although it is assumed that the texture data for plane shadows BST1 and BST2 are directly applied to the ground object data BGD, the ground texture data BGTD is applied to the ground object data BGD, so the shadow image CH12 If it is attempted to move the character following the rendering character CH11, the relationship between the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data becomes complicated. On the other hand, the position of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is changed corresponding to changing the position of the character object data COD, and the plane shadow texture data is added to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD. By applying BST1 and BST2, the shadow image CH12 can be displayed without causing such a disadvantage.

  In the configuration in which object data is provided separately from the ground object data BGD to display the shadow image CH12, the flat shadow plate-like object data BSD is a flat shadow flat plate object data configured in a flat shape without thickness. It is BSD. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing image data in the memory module 133 in advance.

  The plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged at a position spaced upward by one pixel with respect to the ground object data BGD. This makes it possible to display the shadow image CH12 while preventing the ground image BG from being buried.

  In the configuration in which the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed in accordance with the change of the display mode of the effect character CH11, a plurality of flat surface shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided, and they are used in correspondence with the display mode of the effect character CH11. The target plane texture data BST1 and BST2 are changed. Thereby, it is possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 while reducing the processing load.

<Another form of configuration related to flat shadow display>
In the above embodiment, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed in accordance with the change of the display mode of the effect character CH11 by changing the type of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 applied to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the type of texture data BST3 for plane shadow applied to the plate-like object data for plane shadow BSD is changed. Instead, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the flat shadow plate-like object data BSD.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for changing the shape of the shadow image CH12 by changing the shape of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for flat shadow display performed by the display CPU 131 according to this embodiment.

  When it is the start timing of flat shadow display (step S3301: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing flat shadow display is grasped (step S3302). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, and plane shadow texture data BST3. Thereafter, in step S3303, start designation information of flat shadow display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that flat shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or if the process of step S3303 is performed, ground object data BGD and ground are used as data of this use target based on the currently set execution target table in step S3304. Grasp texture data BGTD. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3305). In this case, coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

  In step S3306, character object data COD and character texture data CTD are grasped as data to be used this time, based on the currently set execution target table. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data COD and CTD. (Step S3307). In this case, the character is displayed as if the effect character CH11 is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 70 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 70 (b). Coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD is updated.

  After that, in step S3308, the flat shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped as data to be used this time, based on the currently set execution target table. In the following step S3309, it is determined whether the current update timing is the first shadow display period. In the first shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70A, the flat shadow plate-like object data BSD is formed so that the shape of the shadow image CH12 becomes the first shape mode corresponding to the first display mode of the effect character CH11. The first shape data is used as shape data to be applied, and the second shadow display period is a period in which the shape of the shadow image CH12 corresponds to the second display mode of the effect character CH11 as shown in FIG. 70 (b). The second shape data is used as shape data to be applied to the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD so as to be in the two shape mode. If it is the first shadow display period (step S3309: YES), the first shape data is grasped at step S3310, and if it is the second shadow display period (step S3309: NO), the second shape data is at step S3311. Understand The shape data grasped in step S3310 or step S3311 is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the plane object data BSD for plane shadow and the texture data BST3 for plane shadow.

  When the process of step S3310 is executed or when the process of step S3311 is executed, in step S3312, the texture data for plane shadow BST3 is grasped as data of the current use target based on the execution target table currently set. . Thereafter, in step S3313, parameter information other than the shape data of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is calculated and derived from the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD and the planar shadow texture data BST3 and derived parameter information Are written in the area secured corresponding to the image data BSD, BST3 in the work RAM 132. Thereafter, in step S3314, flat display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is an execution period of flat shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  According to the above-described embodiment, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD instead of changing the type of the plane shadow texture data BST3. It is possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 in accordance with the display mode of the effect character CH11 while suppressing the data volume necessary to store the plane shadow texture data BST3 in advance.

<Still another embodiment of the configuration related to plane shadow display>
-In the configuration in which the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided corresponding to each display mode of the effect character CH11, a first display mode as a display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed to move In addition to the second display mode and the second display mode, a display mode corresponding to an operation path between these display modes may be present. In this case, the flat shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each display mode, and according to such a configuration, the display mode of the shadow image CH12 is displayed as the effect character CH11 It becomes possible to correspond to the aspect in detail. On the other hand, the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and the predetermined second The second plane shadow texture data BST2 may be used as a display target for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group corresponding to the operation period. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to a certain extent while suppressing the data volume for storing the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 in advance.

  In the configuration in which the shape data of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is provided corresponding to each display mode of the effect character CH11, the display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move is In addition to the first display mode and the second display mode, a display mode corresponding to an operation path between these display modes may be present. In this case, shape data of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each display mode, whereby the display mode of the shadow image CH12 is displayed as the effect character CH11 It becomes possible to correspond to the aspect in detail. On the other hand, the first shape data is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and corresponds to the predetermined second operation period The second shape data may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group to be used. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to a certain extent while suppressing the data capacity for storing shape data in advance.

  The object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD for displaying the shadow image CH12 is not limited to the plate-like object data, and is configured in a three-dimensional form having a thickness similar to the character object data COD and the like. It may be used as object data.

  -A configuration for displaying the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 using object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD, and a reflected image showing how the effect character CH11 is reflected on the water surface You may use it to

<Configuration for performing step shadow display>
Next, a configuration for performing step shadow display will be described. FIG. 72 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the step shadow display, and FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 necessary for performing the step shadow display. is there.

  In the step shadow display, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), a movie in which a character for effect CH13, which is recognized by a player as being represented by a person having a face, body, both hands, and both feet, moves using stairs In the situation where the display is being performed, the display content is such that the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 is displayed on the staircase image SG representing the stairs. In this case, the shadow image CH14 is displayed along the step shape. Specifically, the shadow image CH14 is displayed from one tread surface to the tread surface immediately below, and the shadow image CH14 has a step-like shape corresponding to the occurrence of a step due to kicking between the tread surfaces. Is displayed on.

  The display content of the shadow image CH14 changes in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. Specifically, as the effect character CH13 moves up the stairs, the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on one tread surface changes, and the type of tread surface to be displayed on the shadow image CH14 also changes. For example, in a situation where the shadow image CH14 is displayed in the form of a step across two successive treads and a bridge connecting them, the character CH13 for presentation moves to move up the stairs, The range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the tread gradually decreases and the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread gradually increases. Then, a part of the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread surface via a state in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed across the upper tread surface and the kick continuing on the tread surface.

  As image data for displaying the effect character CH13, as shown in FIG. 72B, the memory module 133 stores character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 in advance. Further, as the image data for displaying the staircase image SG, the memory module 133 stores the staircase object data SGD and the staircase texture data SGTD in advance. In addition, as image data for displaying the shadow image CH14, the step-like shadow plate-like object data SSD and the step-wise shadow texture data SST are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  At the time of displaying the shadow image CH14, character object data COD1 for the step shadow plate-like object data SSD to display the effect character CH13 in the world coordinate system and step object data SGD for displaying the step image SG. Placed between The step-like shadow plate-like object data SSD is an object in which a flat object without thickness is made to be step-like according to the shape of the stairs, and is a normal object having a thickness for displaying characters such as people. This is object data in which the number of polygons per unit display surface is smaller than that. The step-like shadow plate-like object data SSD is set to a size smaller than the step object data SGD, and is made to correspond to a partial range in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed in the step portion displayed by the step image SG. Is set. Then, by applying the step shadow texture data SST to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD, the shadow image CH14 is displayed.

  The step shadow plate-like object data SSD is disposed at a position spaced above the step object data SGD by a predetermined distance (specifically, one pixel) in the world coordinate system, and the step shadow plate Character object data COD1 is disposed above the object data SSD. Thus, by disposing the step-shadowing plate-like object data SSD at a position spaced upward with respect to the step object data SGD, the shadow image CH14 is reliably displayed above the step image SG.

  Only one type of step shadow texture data SST is set. When moving the shadow image CH14 in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13, the position where the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is matched with the movement of the effect character CH13. Change. Specifically, when predetermined color information of the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD, base UV coordinate data corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the color information is set. In the configuration in which the color information is applied to the pixels of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD, the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is changed according to the movement of the effect character CH13. In the step-like shadow plate-like object data SSD, the position to which the step-wise shadow texture data SST is applied changes. For example, for the pixels of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD in which the base UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1), the step shadow texture data in which the UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1) In the configuration to which the color information of SST is applied, the texture for the step shadow with respect to the plate-like object data for the step shadow is changed by changing the pixel for which the base UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1). The position to which the data SST is applied changes. Although the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD can be changed in the display CPU 131, the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the step shadow texture data SST and is therefore changed in the display CPU 131 I can not do it.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the UV coordinate animation data UAD is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as data for changing the base UV coordinate data of the stepped shadow plate-like object data SSD at each update timing of the image. It is done. The base UV coordinates of the step-shadowing plate-like object data SSD are made to correspond one-to-one to each update timing of the period during which moving image display is performed so that the effect character CH13 moves on the stairs in the UV coordinate animation data UAD. Data for changing data is set. The data to be changed is the same as each of the base UV coordinate data so that each base UV coordinate data set in each pixel of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is shifted by the same amount in a fixed direction. It is data of the value to be added. By using the UV coordinate animation data UAD, the base UV coordinate data of each pixel of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is shifted by the same amount in a fixed direction at each update timing. Then, by applying the step shadow texture data SST using constant UV coordinate data at each update timing, the shadow image CH14 is moved and displayed while being shifted by the same amount in the predetermined direction at each update timing. Become.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing step shadow display will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing for step shadow display executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for step shadow display is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for step shadow display is started when information on step shadow display is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is the start timing of the step shadow display (step S3401: YES), the UV coordinate animation data UAD is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S3402). Further, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the step shadow display is grasped (step S3403). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, step object data SGD, step texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-like object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST. Thereafter, in step S 3404, start designation information of step shadow display for causing VDP 135 to recognize that step shadow display should be started is stored in the register of display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3401 or if the process of step S3404 is performed, step object data SGD and for stairs are used as data to be used at this time based on the currently set execution target table in step S3405. Grasp texture data SGTD. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the staircase object data SGD and the staircase texture data SGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data SGD and SGTD. (Step S3406). In this case, coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD is updated so that the staircase image SG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

  In step S3407, character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 are grasped as data to be used this time, based on the currently set execution target table. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data COD1 and CTD1. (Step S3408). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is updated so that a moving image of the effect character CH13 going up the stairs is displayed as a moving image (see FIG. 72A).

  After that, in step S3409, based on the currently set execution target table, the step-shadowing plate-like object data SSD is grasped as data to be used this time. In the following step S3410, data for the increment of the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the update timing of this time is read out from the UV coordinate animation data UAD already read out to the work RAM 132, and the read out data is used as the current base UV coordinate data. By adding, base UV coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing is derived. Then, the derived base UV coordinate data is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the step-like shadow plate-like object data SSD.

  Thereafter, in step S3411, the step shadow texture data SST is grasped as data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In the subsequent step S3412, parameter information other than the base UV coordinate data in the step shadow plate-like object data SSD and parameter information of the step shadow texture data SST are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is extracted in the work RAM 132 It writes in the area secured corresponding to the data SSD and SST. Thereafter, in step S 3413, step shadow display designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is an execution period of step shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  In this case, the character object data for character grasped in step S3408 so that the shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the effect character CH11 as coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the step shadow object plate data SSD. Recognize coordinate data corresponding to coordinate data of COD1. In addition, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the stairs acquired in step S3406 so that the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is disposed at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the stairs image SG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

  As described above, when the arithmetic processing for step shadow display is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, Information on usage instructions of the staircase object data SGD, the staircase texture data SGTD, the step shadow plate-like object data SSD, and the step shadow texture data SST is set. Further, parameter information to be applied to each of the image data is set in the drawing list. Further, the step shadow display specification information is set in the drawing list, and the start specification information of the step shadow display is set at the start timing of the step shadow display.

  Next, setting processing for step shadow display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for step shadow display is executed as a part of the setting process for effect performed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). When the step shadow display specification information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for step shadow display is executed.

  When start designation information of step shadow display is set in the current drawing list (step S 3501: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target based on the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area where various image data is stored is grasped, and the various image data is read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasping result (step S3502). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, step object data SGD, step texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-like object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501 or if the process of step S3502 is executed, step object data SGD and step texture data SGTD are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list in step S3503. . Also, in step S3504, the parameter information of the data SGD and SGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information is grasped including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD.

  Thereafter, in step S3505, character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. In step S3506, the parameter information of the data COD1 and CTD1 is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is displayed so that the moving image of the effect character CH13 going up the stairs is displayed as a moving image (see FIG. 72A). To grasp.

  Thereafter, in step S3507, the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3508, base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is grasped based on the current drawing list, and in step S3509, other parameter information to be applied to the data SSD is grasped. In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD for displaying the shadow image CH14 below the effect character CH13 is grasped. In addition, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the stairs acquired in step S3504 so that the step-shadowing plate-like object data SSD is disposed at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the staircase image SG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

  Thereafter, in step S3510, the step shadow texture data SST is grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S 3511, the fixed UV coordinate data of the texture data for step shadows SST is grasped from the texture data SST, and in step S 3512, other parameter information to be applied to the texture data SST is displayed in the current drawing list. Based on

  Thereafter, in step S 3513, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in accordance with the contents corresponding to the grasped results of step S 3503 to step S 3512.

  By executing the setting process for displaying the step shadow as described above, the step object data SGD, the character object data COD1, and the step shadow plate-like object data SSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131 Various parameter information is applied to each object data SGD, COD 1 and SSD, including coordinate data derived by calculation in step 2. Further, corresponding texture data SGTD, CTD1, SST are applied to each object data SGD, COD, SSD. As a result, on the display surface P, as shown in FIG. 72A, a moving image display is performed such that the effect character CH13 is moving on the stairs of the step image SG, and the movement of the effect character CH13 is performed. A moving image display is performed such that the shadow image CH14 follows the shape of the stairs while being deformed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the effect character CH13 is displayed so as to move on the stairs, the texture data for step shadows SST is applied to the plate-like object data SSD for step shadows formed according to the shape of the steps. And the shadow image CH14 is displayed. Thus, the shadow image CH14 can be displayed along the shape of the stairs.

  The step-like shadow plate-like object data SSD is set corresponding to the entire range in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed in the stairs, and the base UV coordinate data of the step-wise shadow plate-like object data SSD is changed to change the shadow image CH14 By changing the display position, the data capacity necessary for storing the image data can be reduced compared to the configuration in which a plurality of types of step shadow plate-like object data corresponding to each display position of the shadow image CH14 are prepared. It is possible to reduce.

  Instead of applying the step shadow texture data SST to the step object data SGD, by setting the step shadow plate-like object data SSD separately and applying the step shadow texture data SST, base UV coordinate data When changing the display position of the shadow image CH14, it becomes possible to prevent the display position of the step texture data SGTD from being affected.

<Another form of the configuration concerning the step shadow display>
The configuration for changing the display position of the image by changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data without changing the UV coordinate data of the texture is used to display the flat shadow image CH12 described above It is also good. In this case, the size of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is not made to correspond to the whole of the ground object data BGD, but is made to correspond to a partial range in which the shadow image CH12 can be displayed in the ground object data BGD. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD.

  When the UV coordinate data of the texture is changeable in the display CPU 131, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step object data SGD without using the step shadow plate-like object data SSD. It may be In this case, after applying the staircase texture data SGTD to the staircase object data SGD, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the position corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the display CPU 131. According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity at the point that the step-like shadow plate-like object data SSD becomes unnecessary, and the relationship with the UV coordinate data without changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data. It becomes possible to perform moving display along the step shape of the shadow image CH14.

  The object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD for displaying the shadow image CH14 is not limited to the plate-like object data, and is configured in a three-dimensional shape having a thickness similar to the character object data COD1 etc. It may be used as object data.

  -A configuration for displaying the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 using object data provided separately from the stair object data SGD, and a reflected image showing how the effect character CH13 is reflected on the water surface You may use it to

<Configuration for performing variable display effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the variable display effect, and FIG. 75 (b) is for explaining the configuration of the area used when executing the variable display effect in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. FIG.

  In the variable display effect, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the effect character CH15, which is recognized by the player as a person having a face, body, both hands, and both feet, is being displayed in front of moving display This is an effect that a plurality of symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are variably displayed. In the variable display effect, three types of the first symbol display unit CH16, the second symbol display unit CH17, and the third symbol display unit CH18 are variably displayed, but the number of symbol display units may be one, and the other There may be more than one. Each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 has the same external appearance, and a rendering symbol is attached to each of the surfaces arranged in the circumferential direction. The types of effect symbols arranged in the circumferential direction in one symbol display portion CH16 to CH18 are all different, while the types of effect symbols set in each symbol display portion CH16 to CH18 are the same.

  The variable display effect is executed as a promotion effect in the open / close execution mode. The promotion effect is an effect that can normally occur in the case of the jackpot result and in the case of the 15R high probability jackpot result. Specifically, at the end of the effects for the game run, the jackpot result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time while displaying the final stop combination of even symbols corresponding to the jackpot result in the symbol display device 41 usually If it is 15R high probability big hit result, high probability corresponding production is done during opening and closing execution mode, when big hit result which became the trigger of this opening and closing execution mode is usually big hit result during opening and closing execution mode It is an effect in which a low probability response effect is performed. The variable display effect is started in the open / close execution mode, and in the case of the open / close execution mode triggered by the 15R high probability big hit result, the same effect pattern when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is stopped In the case of the open / close execution mode triggered by the large jackpot result, the combination of the same effect symbols is not stopped and displayed when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is stopped.

  When the variable display effect is executed, each symbol display section CH16 to CH18 is displayed semi-transparently for at least a predetermined period. In this case, each symbol display section CH16 to CH18 is displayed as a three-dimensional image using the object data and texture data stored in advance in the memory module 133. If this is done, there is a risk that the image behind the object data set as three-dimensional data may be seen through as it is. On the other hand, instead of subjecting the object data for displaying each symbol display portion CH16 to CH18 to a semi-transparent processing, two-dimensional drawing of each symbol display portion CH16 to CH18 created separately from the effect character CH15 By subjecting the data to semi-transparent processing and superimposing it on the two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), in front of the effect character CH15. The translucent symbol display sections CH16 to CH18 are variably displayed.

  In order to perform the display control, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 includes a drawing buffer BF1, a first storage buffer BF2, a second storage buffer BF3, and a third storage as shown in FIG. 75 (b). A buffer BF4 and a fourth storage buffer BF5 are provided. In each of these buffers BF1 to BF5, unit areas equal in number to the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 are set, and 1 byte is allocated to each color of RGB in each unit area. Therefore, drawing data similar to the drawing data drawn in the frame areas 142a and 142b can be drawn in each of the buffers BF1 to BF5. Further, in each unit area, in addition to the area of each color of RBG, an area of 1 byte for setting an α value is set.

  The drawing buffer BF1 is used to draw two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15 and two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the respective symbol display sections CH16 to CH18. The first storage buffer BF2 is used to temporarily store two-dimensional drawing data of the effect character CH15 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The second storage buffer BF3 is used to temporarily store two-dimensional drawing data of the first symbol display unit CH16 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The third storage buffer BF4 is used to temporarily store two-dimensional drawing data of the second symbol display unit CH17 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The fourth storage buffer BF5 is used to temporarily store two-dimensional drawing data of the third symbol display unit CH18 created using the drawing buffer BF1.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the variable display effect performed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the variable display effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the variable display effect is started when information on the variable display effect is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is the start timing of the variable display effect (step S3601: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the variable display effect is grasped (step S3602). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display section CH16, and the second It includes symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying symbol display portion CH17, and symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying third symbol display portion CH18. Thereafter, in step S3603, start designation information of the fluctuation display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the fluctuation display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3601 or the process of step S3603 is executed, then in step S3604, the effect character CH15 is displayed as data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. The object data for character and the texture data for character are grasped. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the object data for character and the texture data for character, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 132 (step S3605). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data for character is updated so that the display content is recognized that the effect character CH15 is running toward the front side of the display surface P.

  Also, in step S3606, based on the currently set execution target table, grasp the object data for each symbol and the texture data for each symbol for displaying each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 as data to be used this time Do. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the symbol object data and each symbol texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 132 (step S3607 ). In this case, in the world coordinate system of each pixel of each symbol object data, the display contents are recognized so that each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 is recognized as being circling in a predetermined direction in front of the effect character CH15. Coordinate data is updated. Further, the α value applied to each symbol object data in the entire period of the variable display effect is set as opaque information which does not transmit an image which is to be overlapped on the back side of the display surface P.

  Thereafter, in step S3608, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not it is a translucent period in which each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 is displayed in a translucent state. If it is a semi-transparent period (step S3608: YES), semi-transparent value data is grasped in step S3609 based on the execution target table currently set. Further, in step S3610, semitransparent designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a semitransparent period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3608, or if the process of step S3610 is executed, variable display effect specification information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is an execution period of the variable display effect is displayed in step S3611. Store in register.

  As described above, when the calculation process for the variable display effect is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) is a character object for displaying the effect character CH15. Data and character texture data, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the second symbol display unit CH17 In addition, information on usage instructions for symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display section CH18 is set. Further, parameter information to be applied to each of the image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, the variable display effect specification information is set in the drawing list, and further, the start specification information of the variable display effect is set at the start timing of the variable display effect, and the semitransparent specification information is set in the semitransparent period. Ru. Furthermore, when semitransparent designation information is set, semitransparent value data is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the setting process for the variable display effect performed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the variable display effect is executed as a part of the setting process for effect performed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for the variable display effect is executed.

  If start designation information of the variable display effect is set in the current drawing list (step S3701: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target based on the information of the address set in the drawing list. The addresses at which the various image data are stored are grasped, and the various image data are read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasping results (step S3702). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display section CH16, and the second It includes symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying symbol display portion CH17, and symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying third symbol display portion CH18.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or if the process of step S3702 is executed, character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15 based on the current drawing list in step S3703. Understand as data to be displayed. In step S3704, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information is grasped including coordinate data for setting the display content to be recognized that the effect character CH15 is running toward the front side of the display surface P.

  Thereafter, in step S3705, the object data for each symbol and the texture data for each symbol for displaying each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 are grasped based on the current drawing list. In step S3706, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information is grasped including coordinate data to be displayed so that it is recognized that each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 circulates in a predetermined direction in front of the effect character CH15. In addition, as the α value applied to each symbol object data, it is possible to grasp opaque information which does not transmit an image which is to be overlapped on the back side of the display surface P.

  Thereafter, in step S3707, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in accordance with the content corresponding to the grasped result in steps S3703 to S3706. Thereby, in the world coordinate system, the object data of the character CH15 for presentation, the first design, in the positional relationship which enables the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the image for the variation display effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). The object data of the display unit CH16, the object data of the second symbol display unit CH17, and the object data of the third symbol display unit CH18 are set. That is, while the object data of each symbol display section CH16 to CH18 is arranged in front of the object data of the effect character CH15, the object data of the first symbol display section CH16 is arranged on the left, and the second symbol display section at the center The object data of CH17 is arranged, and the object data of the third symbol display unit CH18 is arranged to the right.

  Next, drawing data creation processing for variable display effect performed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The drawing data creation process for the variation display effect is the effect performed in step S2311 of the drawing process (FIG. 44) and the drawing data creation process for the symbol when the variation display effect designation information is set in the drawing list. It is executed as part of the process of

  In the following description, the explanatory views of FIG. 79 (a) to FIG. 79 (c) and FIG. 80 (a) to FIG. 80 (e) will be appropriately referred to. FIG. 79 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining drawing data of the first symbol display section CH16 stored in the second storage buffer BF3, and FIG. 79 (b) is stored in the third storage buffer BF4. FIG. 79 (c) is an explanatory view for explaining drawing data of the second symbol display unit CH17, and FIG. 79 (c) is for explaining drawing data of the third symbol display unit CH18 stored in the fourth storage buffer BF5. FIG. Further, FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data of a variable display effect image is created using drawing data stored in each of the storage buffers BF2 to BF5. FIG.

  First, in step S3801, the drawing buffer BF1 of the expansion buffer 141 is initialized. At the time of initialization processing, each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized. Thus, 1 byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to "0" in each unit area, and "0" is cleared to correspond to 1 byte data corresponding to the alpha value in each unit area to be completely transparent. Be done.

  In the following step S3802, rendering processing of the effect character is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the rendering character CH15 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written to the unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The alpha value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity, and the alpha value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is maintained as data corresponding to complete transparency. Thereafter, at step S3803, the storage processing to the first storage buffer BF2 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3802 is stored as it is in the first storage buffer BF2.

  In the following step S3804, the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized as in step S3801. Thus, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and 1-byte data corresponding to the alpha value corresponds to complete transparency in each unit area. It is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S3805, the drawing processing of the first symbol display portion is executed. In the drawing processing, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the first symbol display section CH16 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (a-1), the display target data for displaying the first symbol display section CH16 corresponds to the display position of the final first symbol display section CH16 in the drawing buffer BF1. It is written to the unit area. The alpha value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79 (a-2), and the alpha value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to complete transparency is maintained. Thereafter, in step S3806, the storage processing to the second storage buffer BF3 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3805 is stored as it is in the second storage buffer BF3.

  In the following step S3807, the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized in the same manner as step S3801. Thus, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and 1-byte data corresponding to the alpha value corresponds to complete transparency in each unit area. It is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S3808, the drawing processing of the second symbol display portion is executed. In the drawing processing, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the second symbol display unit CH17 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (b-1), the display target data for displaying the second symbol display section CH17 corresponds to the final display position of the second symbol display section CH17 in the drawing buffer BF1. It is written to the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79 (b-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to complete transparency is maintained. Thereafter, in step S3809, storage processing to the third storage buffer BF4 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3808 is stored as it is in the third storage buffer BF4.

  In the following step S3810, the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized as in step S3801. Thus, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and 1-byte data corresponding to the alpha value corresponds to complete transparency in each unit area. It is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S3811, the drawing processing of the third symbol display portion is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the third symbol display unit CH18 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (c-1), the display object data for displaying the third symbol display section CH18 corresponds to the final display position of the third symbol display section CH18 in the drawing buffer BF1. It is written to the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79 (c-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to complete transparency is maintained. Thereafter, at step S3812, the storage processing to the fourth storage buffer BF5 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3811 is stored as it is in the fourth storage buffer BF5.

  In the subsequent step S3813, the drawing data stored in the first storage buffer BF2 is written to the effect and pattern buffer in the screen buffer 144. In this case, display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written to the unit area of the effect and symbol buffer corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The alpha value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity, and the alpha value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is maintained as data corresponding to complete transparency.

  Thereafter, in step S3814, it is determined whether semi-transparent designation information is set in the current drawing list. If semi-transparent designation information is set, semi-transparent value data is read out from the current drawing list in step S3815.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3814, or if the process of step S3815 is performed, in step S3816, rendering data in the second to fourth storage buffers BF3 to BF5 is displayed in the screen buffer 144 And write to the buffer for the symbol. In this case, display object data for displaying the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18 corresponding to the respective drawing data is a buffer for effect and symbols corresponding to the respective display positions of the respective symbol display sections CH16 to CH18. Is written to the unit area of

  Here, when the process of step S3815 is not executed, the alpha value of opacity is set to the display target data corresponding to each drawing data to be written, and completeness is applied to data other than the corresponding display target data. The transparent α value is set. Therefore, the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is effective for the part overlapping the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 among the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 already written. The display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is maintained as it is for a portion which is overwritten on the display target data of the character CH15 and does not overlap the display target data of each of the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18. In the display target data of each of the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18, the display target data of each of the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18 is added with an alpha value of opacity for a portion not overlapping the display target data of the effect character CH15. It is set by. In each unit area of the effect and symbol buffers, the unit area in which neither the display object data of the effect character CH15 nor the display object data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is written is set to an α value of perfect transparency. It will be

On the other hand, when the process of step S3815 is executed, a translucent α value (for example, “0.5”) is set to the display target data corresponding to each drawing data to be written, and the processing is performed. In addition to the display target data to be displayed, the completely transparent α value is set. Therefore, in the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 already written, portions overlapping with the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are represented by the former display target data and the latter display target data. A blending process with the above-mentioned translucent alpha value is performed. For example, the color information of the former display target data in a predetermined unit area is "r10, g10, b10", the color information of the latter display target data is "r20, g20, b20", and the semi-transparent .alpha. In the case of "α 20",
R: r10 x (1-α20) + r20 x α20
G: g10 × (1−α20) + g20 × α20
B: b10 × (1−α20) + b20 × α20
It becomes.

  In addition, of the display target data for displaying the rendering character CH15 that has already been written, display target data for displaying the rendering character CH15 for portions that do not overlap the display target data of the respective symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. Is maintained as it is. Further, for the portions of the display object data of each symbol display area CH16 to CH18 which do not overlap with the display object data of effect character CH15, the above-mentioned translucent alpha value is added to the display object data of each symbol display area CH16 to CH18 It is set in the In each unit area of the effect and symbol buffers, the display object data of the effect character CH15 and the display object data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are not written. It will be

  By executing the drawing data creation process, each drawing data stored in the first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5 is combined as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (d). As shown in 80 (e), an image for variable display effect is displayed. In this case, display object data for displaying each of the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18 is created from the object data in which the alpha value of opacity is set as shown in FIG. 80 (b) to FIG. 80 (d) It is configured to set a translucent α value for the target data and to superimpose it on the display target data of the effect character CH15. This makes it possible to display the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 in a semi-transparent state while preventing the occurrence of an event that the image on the back side of the object data that should not be originally displayed etc. is seen through as it is It becomes.

  It is necessary to change the drawing buffer BF1 of the creation destination when drawing data is created by using the drawing buffer BF1 as a buffer for individually creating drawing data of the effect character CH15 and each of the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18. As a result, the process design can be simplified.

  Before creating drawing data of the effect character CH15 and the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18 in the drawing buffer BF1, the α value of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is set to “0” corresponding to complete transparency. Thus, in the drawing data after creation in the drawing buffer BF1, the unit areas other than the unit areas for displaying the effect character CH15 and the respective symbol display parts CH16 to CH18 do not require post-processing, and the α value is Can be made "0" corresponding to complete transparency.

<Another form of the configuration concerning the variable display effect>
· Although display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is individually created for drawing buffer BF1 and display target data corresponding to each is stored in different storage buffers BF3 to BF5, the present invention is limited thereto Alternatively, display target data of each of the symbol display sections CH16 to CH18 may be collectively created in the drawing buffer BF1, and the display target data created collectively may be stored in one storage buffer. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of times the initialization process of the drawing buffer, the process of creating the display target data, and the process of storing the display target data can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

  The configuration is not limited to setting the same translucent value data for drawing data separately stored in each of the second storage buffer BF3, the third storage buffer BF4, and the fourth storage buffer BF5, The semitransparent value data to be set may be different for each drawing data.

<Configuration for Display of Distortion Background>
Next, a configuration for performing distorted background display will be described. FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of distorted background display. FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining image data for performing distorted background display.

  In the distorted background display, as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), the background image BGG displayed so as to be recognized by the player as distortion does not occur as shown in FIG. 81 (a-1). Is displayed to be recognized by the player as being distorted. In this case, a distorted background display is performed so that the player recognizes that distortion is occurring in two of the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis (specifically, X-axis and Y-axis).

  As the background image BGG, as shown in FIG. 82A, the background plate-like object data GSD and the background texture data GTD1 stored in advance in the memory module 133 are used. The background plate-like object data GSD is object data which is formed in a flat shape having no thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface as compared with a normal object having a thickness for displaying a character such as a person. . Then, the background texture data GTD1 is applied to the background plate-like object data GSD set in the world coordinate system to create background drawing data, whereby the background image BGG can be displayed. Become.

  The distorted background display is not performed by distorting the background plate-like object data GSD in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), but by adjusting the data of the background texture data GTD1. To be done. Specifically, assuming that the background texture data GTD1 is set as color information as shown in FIG. 81 (b-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (b-2), By adjusting the color information so that the horizontal width of the color information is wide, as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), the background image BGG is displayed so as to be recognized by the gaming ball as distortion occurs. Thus, the distorted background display is performed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 which is two-dimensional data, not distorting the background plate-like object data GSD which is three-dimensional data. It is possible to keep the data to be adjusted as two-dimensional data when performing the distortion background display, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

  The adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 for performing the distorted background display is set to texture data provided separately from the background texture data GTD1. As the texture data, as shown in FIG. 82A, the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  The first refracting texture data GTD2 and the second refracting texture data GTD3 have the same number of pixels as the number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1, and each pixel of the refracting texture data GTD2 and GTD3 and the background texture data Each pixel of GTD1 corresponds one to one. In each pixel of the background texture data GTD1, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), an area of 1 byte corresponding to each of RGB colors is set, and the refracting texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are also shown in FIG. As shown in 82 (c), an area of 1 byte corresponding to each of RGB colors is set. That is, although the content set for each pixel is different for each of the texture data GTD1 to GTD3, the basic data configuration is the same for the background texture data GTD1 and each of the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3. There is.

  The data (hereinafter also referred to as R value, G value, and B value) corresponding to each RGB color set to each pixel of each of the texture data for refractions GTD 2 and GTD 3 is not used as color information but distorted. Used as degree information. Specifically, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X axis, the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y axis, and the B value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Z axis . However, distortion of the background image BGG is not generated for all of the X axis, Y axis and Z axis, but is generated only for two axes of the X axis and Y axis as described above. Therefore, distortion data is set to the R and G values in each pixel of each of the refraction texture data GTD 2 and GTD 3, but certain data is set such that all bits of the B value become “0”. It is done.

  The R value and the G value of each pixel are set such that the adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 differs between the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), if the center side in the horizontal direction of the first refraction texture data GTD2 is concaved backward while the left and right sides are expanded forward, the player is In the second refraction texture data GTD3, the center side in the horizontal direction in the background image BGG bulges forward while the adjustment mode of the color information to be recognized in An adjustment mode of color information is set so as to be recognized by the player when being depressed. With this configuration, the background image BGG is constant by alternately switching the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 as texture data for refraction to be applied to the background texture data GTD1. It is possible to perform a display that allows the player to recognize that there is a wave back and forth in the pattern of.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing distortion background display will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for distortion background display performed by the display CPU 131. Calculation processing for distortion background display is executed in the background calculation processing of step S2206 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The computation processing for distortion background display is started when information on distortion background display is set in the execution target table currently set.

  If it is the start timing of distorted background display (step S3901: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing distorted background display is grasped (step S3902). The image data includes background plate-like object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3. Thereafter, in step S3903, start designation information of distorted background display for causing VDP 135 to recognize that distorted background display should be started is stored in the register of display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901 or if the process of step S3903 is executed, a plate-like object for background as data of the current use target based on the execution target table currently set in steps S3904 and S3905. The data GSD and the background texture data GTD1 are grasped. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the background plate-like object data GSD and the background texture data GTD1, and the area obtained by making the derived parameter information correspond to the image data GSD and GTD1 in the work RAM 132 (Step S3906). In this case, the shape data (that is, the relative position of each pixel) in the world coordinate system of the background plate-like object data GSD is constant during the period in which the distorted background display is performed.

  Then, in step S3907, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether the current update timing is the first distortion display period. The first distortion display period is a period in which the first refraction texture data GTD2 is used as the refraction texture data, and the second distortion display period is a period in which the second refraction texture data GTD3 is used as the refraction texture data. If it is the first distortion display period (step S3907: YES), the first refraction texture data GTD2 is grasped in step S3908, and if it is the second distortion display period (step S3907: NO), the first distortion display period is (2) Grasp texture data GTD3 for refraction. When the process of step S3908 or step S3909 is executed, distortion background display designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is a distortion background display execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131 in step S3910.

  As described above, when the calculation processing for distortion background display is performed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes background plate-like object data GSD and background texture data The information of the usage instruction of the GTD 1 is set, and the information of the usage instruction of the side to be used this time among the first refraction texture data GTD 2 and the second refraction texture data GTD 3 is set. Further, parameter information to be applied to each of the image data is set in the drawing list. Further, distortion background display specification information is set in the drawing list, and further, distortion specification background display start specification information is set at the start timing of distortion background display.

  Next, setting processing for distortion background display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for distortion background display is performed as a part of the setting process for background performed in step S2302 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). In addition, when distortion background display specification information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for distortion background display is performed.

  When start designation information of distorted background display is set in the current drawing list (step S4001: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target based on the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area where various image data is stored is grasped, and the various image data is read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasping result (step S4002). The image data includes background plate-like object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4001, or if the process of step S4002 is executed, the plate-like object data for background background GTD1 and the texture data for background background GTD1 are displayed based on the current drawing list in steps S4003 and S4004. As the data of Further, in step S4005, the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 corresponding to the distortion display period of this time are grasped as data to be displayed based on the drawing list of this time. Thereafter, in step S4006, parameter information of the various image data is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S4007, a refraction application process for applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used this time to the background texture data GTD1 is executed.

  In the refraction application process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, first, the background texture data GTD1 is separately stored in the background separate storage area 141a provided in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S4101). As a result, in a situation where the background texture data GTD1 has already been read out to the expansion buffer GTD1, the same data as the background texture data GTD1 is stored and held in the background separate storage area 141a. In the following description, the background texture data GTD1 read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 is referred to as the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn, and the background written in the separate storage area 141a for background The texture data GTD1 for background is referred to as background texture data GTD1 to be separately stored. Thereafter, in step S4102, the same number as the total number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1 is set in the application counter provided in the register 153 of the VDP 135.

  In the subsequent step S4103, R value and G value are extracted from one pixel corresponding to the current application counter in the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used this time. Then, in step S4104, a refraction arithmetic process using the extracted R value and G value is executed.

  In the refraction processing, when the pixel corresponding to the value of the current application counter in the background texture data GTD1 is used as the reference pixel, it is determined how many pixels continuous from the reference pixel are to be subjected to the blending processing. The data extracted in step S4103 and the data for determining what weighting is to be applied to each pixel for which the blending process is to be performed in relation to the distance from the reference pixel are extracted in step S4103. It calculates from a predetermined arithmetic expression using a value and a G value. In this case, the pixels to be subjected to the blending process are limited to pixels aligned on one axis (specifically, the X axis in FIG. 81A) with respect to the reference pixel, and on the other one axis (specifically Does not include the pixels aligned in the Z axis in FIG. 81 (a). The refraction calculation process is performed by the refraction calculation unit 154 provided as a dedicated circuit in the VDP 135. Also, as described above, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X axis and the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y axis, and each of the R value and the G value is 1 byte data Because it is a quantity, it can take values of 0-255. The refraction operation unit 154 derives target pixel data for specifying pixels to be included as an execution target of the blending process based on the G value corresponding to the information of the degree of distortion to the Y axis, and information of the degree of distortion to the X axis The weighting data for identifying the weighting of the blending process in relation to the distance from the reference pixel is derived based on the R value corresponding to.

  After the refraction calculation process is performed in step S4104, in step S4105, the color information of the pixel corresponding to the calculation result of the refraction calculation process of step S4104 is stored separately using the target pixel data. It extracts from the background texture data GTD1. Then, each blend value corresponding to the above weighting data is integrated with respect to color information of each pixel, and the sum of each value after integration is calculated (step S4106). In this case, the blending process is performed individually for each RGB color of each pixel. Thereafter, the values of RGB calculated in step S4106 are overwritten on the pixel corresponding to the current value of the application counter in the background texture data GTD1 to be rendered. As a result, the color information adjustment process corresponding to the to-be-used texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used is executed for the pixel of the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn corresponding to the value of the current application counter.

  Thereafter, in step S4108, the value of the application counter of the register 153 is decremented by one, and it is determined whether the value of the application counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4109). When the value of the application counter is 1 or more (step S4109: NO), the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 is executed for the pixel corresponding to the value of the application counter after the update.

  Returning to the description of setting processing for distortion background display, after executing refraction application processing in step S4007, setting processing in the world coordinate system according to the contents corresponding to the processing results of steps S4003 to S4007 in step S4008 Run.

  By executing the setting process for displaying distorted background as described above, the background plate-like object data GSD is arranged in the world coordinate system, and various parameter information derived by calculation in the display CPU 131 is used for the background. Applies to plate-like object data GSD. In addition, background texture data GTD1 after color information adjustment processing has been executed using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used this time is applied to the background plate-like object data GSD. . As a result, on the display surface P, the background image BGG is displayed such that the player recognizes that distortion occurs in the X axis and the Y axis.

  As described above, by providing data for applying refraction as texture data, it is possible to generate a refraction effect on an image by using the data configuration of texture data as it is. In this case, it is not necessary to store in the memory module 133 data having a dedicated data configuration for causing refraction, and data for applying refraction in the same manner as reading of other texture data is performed. It becomes possible to read from the memory module 133. For example, in the case of a dedicated data configuration for causing refraction, the processing content for expanding data in the expansion buffer 141 is different from that of the texture data, but for applying refraction By providing the data as texture data, it is possible to make the processing content for the development the same as in the case of normal texture data. Thus, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In a configuration in which data corresponding to each color of RGB is set as texture data, the refraction operation unit 154 does not use all the data but uses only the R value and the G value as part of the data. The color information adjustment process of the texture data GTD1 for color is executed. As a result, the processing can be simplified as compared with the configuration using each data of RGB, and the time required for the adjustment processing of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 can be shortened.

  The distortion is displayed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 which is two-dimensional data, instead of distorting the background plate-like object data GSD which is three-dimensional data, thereby displaying the distorted background. When background display is performed, data to be adjusted can be kept as two-dimensional data, and processing load can be reduced.

<Another form of configuration related to distorted background display>
· Instead of adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, use the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 for each pixel of the background plate-like object data GSD The background plate-like object data GSD may be distorted by adjusting the coordinate data, and as a result, a distorted background may be displayed.

  ・ A period in which the background texture data GTD1 is to be drawn as it is without applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 instead of the configuration in which the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are always applied to the background texture data GTD1. May be set before or after the distortion background display period. In this case, it is easy for the player to recognize that the background image BGG is distorted.

  -Instead of the configuration for deriving parameter information for refracting an image using two values of R value, G value and B value of texture data, using one value or all values The parameter information may be derived.

  -Instead of the configuration in which parameter information for refracting an image is derived using texture data, other parameter information such as a transparency value of the image may be derived using texture data.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) When the sound-light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute an effect, the effect content in the second step is instructed by a command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3. However, it may be configured to be instructed whether or not the second stage of the execution of performance is instructed, and there is a case where there is a case where the effect content is instructed or a case where the execution of the second stage of execution is instructed. It is also good.

  (2) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of the contents of a plurality of types of second steps included in one effect Instead of the configuration, one command including command data corresponding to each of contents of a plurality of types of second stages included in one effect may be transmitted. Specifically, a command including one command data corresponding to the contents of the first stage and each command data corresponding to the contents of each second stage may be transmitted. Even in this case, it is preferable that each of the contents of each second stage be distinguished in byte units.

  (3) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to the contents of the plurality of types of second stages included in one effect In the configuration, when the first command data CD1 of each command transmitted before the end command is transmitted do not match, the display CPU 72 requests the sound-side MPU 62 to retransmit the command, and the re-request is made. In such a case, the same command may be transmitted again from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. As a result, even if the command has been rewritten due to electrical noise, re-transmission of the command enables accurate execution of presentation and notification.

  (4) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 is transmitted in correspondence with the contents of the plurality of types of second steps included in one effect. In the configuration, the start command may be sent before the plurality of types of commands corresponding to one of the effects are sent. This makes it possible to clearly grasp in the display CPU 72 whether or not a command corresponding to one of the effects is being transmitted.

  (5) V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) even during execution of background processing at step S906 included in task processing (FIG. 19), effect processing at step S909 and symbol processing at step S912 (FIG. 15) A new processing cycle may be started. In this case, the task processing may be resumed from the middle of the interrupted arithmetic processing in the next processing cycle of the V interrupt processing, or may be restarted from the beginning of the interrupted arithmetic processing. According to this configuration, it is possible to start a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process early.

  (6) When the execution target table for notification is read as the execution target in the display CPU 72, a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during execution of the task processing (FIG. 19) Even if the task processing is executed next time, task processing may be executed using information corresponding to new pointer information in the execution target table, instead of resuming the processing from the middle of interruption. This makes it possible to prioritize the progress of the content of the notification.

  (7) When a new process cycle of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) is started during execution of the task process (FIG. 19) and the process is resumed from the middle of the interruption process cycle of the next task process Although the display CPU 72 transmits the delay command to the sound light side MPU 62 to adjust the pointer information of the control pattern table in the sound light side MPU 62, the adjustment may not be performed.

  (8) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead, all cameras arranged in the world coordinate system are arranged. A configuration may be adopted in which a single camera is commonly set for image data.

  (9) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, the effect image and the symbol image, but it is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image It may be configured to be projected, may be projected together in units of the effect image and the symbol image, or may be projected as all together.

  (10) In the second embodiment, when color information setting processing (step S2309) is performed, setting of color information such as pasting of a texture may be performed only on the projected surface. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, setting of color information such as texture mapping may be performed after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

  (11) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command sent from the main control device 50, display control based on the command sent from the main control device 50 The device 90 may control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control unit 50, and both functions of both control units may be integrated into the main control unit 50. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

  (12) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
A display control unit (VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display unit using generation data (drawing data) generated by data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152);
Equipped with
The data generation means includes information derivation means (function for executing the processing of step S2807 to step S2815 in the display CPU 131) for deriving control information (coordinate data) used to generate the generated data.
The information deriving means is
Pre-derivation setting means (function of executing the processing of step S2808 and step S2809 in the display CPU 131) for setting the derivation storage means (coordinate calculation area 169) to a pre-derivation state;
A derivation execution unit (function of executing the processing of step S2810 in the display CPU 131) for deriving the control information using the derivation storage unit set in the pre-derivation state;
The setting to the state before derivation by the setting means before derivation is a configuration that can be executed multiple times to generate the generated data at the update timing of one image,
The derivation execution means sets a plurality of individual images (group unit character CHG 1) after setting of the pre-derivation state is performed by the pre-derivation setting means and before setting of the pre-derivation state is newly performed. To CHG5), the multi-correspondence deriving unit (function to execute the processing of step S2810 of the display CPU 131 in the case of deriving coordinate data of the set skeleton data FRD2) is provided. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature A1, it is possible to change the contents of the generated data by changing the control information by generating the generated data for image display using the control information, and diversifying the display mode of the image It is possible to In addition, in the case of deriving control information, it is preferable to derive the control information preferably by using derivation storage means and setting the derivation storage means to a pre-derivation state and then starting derivation of control information. It becomes possible.

  In this case, control information corresponding to a plurality of types of individual images is derived after setting of the state before derivation is performed on the storage means for derivation and before setting of the state before derivation is newly performed. Be done. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the control information as compared with the configuration in which the setting before derivation is performed for each individual image. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature A2. The pre-derivation setting means sets the pre-derivation information about the individual image to be the derivation target of the control information after initializing the storage means for derivation in the derivation memory means after the initialization. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein storage means for the game is set to the pre-derivation state.

  According to the feature A2, when the control information is derived, the control information can be appropriately derived by initializing the derivation storage unit and setting the pre-derivation information. In this case, since the control information is derived for a plurality of types of individual images after setting of the state before derivation is performed and before setting of the state before derivation is newly performed, storage means for derivation It is possible to reduce the number of times of initialization and pre-derivation information setting, and to reduce the processing load for deriving control information.

  Feature A3. The data generation unit uses one image data (set skeleton data FRD2) to display the plurality of types of individual images to be collectively derived by the plurality of correspondence deriving units. A game machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that

  According to the feature A3, since plural types of individual images are displayed by one image data, the control information derived collectively is not applied to the plural image data but to the one image data. Just do it. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the image data to which the control information is to be applied.

Feature A4. When the data generation unit generates the generation data for displaying the image in which the individual image operates, the data generation unit is data set corresponding to the individual image, and is reference data (skeleton data FRD1 serving as a reference of movement). , Skeletal data for collection FRD2), deformation data (skin data SKD1, skin data for collection SKD2) to be deformed according to the reference data, and color data (texture data BTD1) for which color information to be applied to the deformation data is defined. , And the texture data for setting BTD2) can be used,
Each of the plurality of types of individual images to be the target for which the control information is collectively derived by the multiple correspondence deriving unit is an image that can be displayed by using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data. Yes,
Any one of the features A1 to A3 characterized in that the content of the reference data corresponding to the plurality of types of individual images is changed such that the operation mode of the plurality of types of individual images is changed by the control information. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature A4, since moving image display of a plurality of individual images is performed using reference data, deformation data, and color data, it is possible to realistically display moving images of a plurality of individual images. It becomes. In this case, since control information for changing the content of reference data is derived collectively for a plurality of types of individual images, the processing load is extreme even if the configuration is to use reference data, deformation data, and color data. It is possible to prevent the

Feature A5. The data generation unit is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating data for displaying an image on which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) operates. ,
In the feature A4, the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual image. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A5, even when a plurality of individual images are simultaneously displayed using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, data of the total of the reference data for displaying the plurality of individual images Since the capacity is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, it becomes possible to suppress the amount of data to be targeted for derivation of control information and application of the derived control information It is possible to reduce the load.

Feature A6. The reference data includes a plurality of unit reference data (bone data BOD1 to BOD50, ABD1 to ABD50), and the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data is changed to individually correspond to the reference data. The configuration is such that the operation mode of the image is changed,
The plurality of unit reference data are set in a data relationship such that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly.
The unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in a relationship of the sub-unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image, or the feature A4 or The gaming machine described in A5.

  According to the feature A6, since the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the operation mode of one individual image is determined by the one reference data. In the image, it is possible to more realistically express the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in a relationship of the sub unit reference data to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. Thus, when moving the main individual image and the sub individual image together, by utilizing the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data, position data for the main unit reference data is obtained. It is sufficient to adjust the control information to change the.

  Feature A7. It is possible to change the position data of the sub unit reference data without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data, The gaming machine according to the feature A6.

  According to the feature A7, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set between the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is set regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

  Feature A8. The unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image are in one-to-one correspondence, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is main among the corresponding unit reference data A game machine according to feature A6 or A7, wherein a data relationship is set such that unit reference data and unit reference data of a sub individual image become sub unit reference data.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to associate the main individual image and the sub individual image in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature A9. The main individual image and the sub individual image are identical or substantially identical in the number and arrangement of unit reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A6 to A8, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

  According to the feature A9, since at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared by the main individual image and the sub individual image, it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary to store various data.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 for any one of the features A1 to A9. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
A display control unit (VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display unit using generation data (drawing data) generated by data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152);
Equipped with
When the data generation means generates the generation data for displaying the image on which the individual image operates, the data generation unit is data set corresponding to the individual image, and is reference data as a reference of movement (a set skeleton Using data FRD2), deformation data (set skin data SKD2) deformed according to the reference data, and color data (set texture data BTD2) for which color information to be applied to the deformation data is defined Possible configuration,
The reference data includes a plurality of unit reference data (bone data ABD1 to ABD50), and the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data is changed to thereby change the operation mode of the individual image corresponding to the reference data. Is the configuration to be changed,
The plurality of unit reference data are set in a data relationship such that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly.
The unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual images (second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5) among the plural types of individual images is the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image (first set unit character CHG1). Game machine characterized in that the relationship between the sub-unit reference data is set.

  According to the feature B1, when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed, so that the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. In the image, it is possible to more realistically express the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in a relationship of the sub unit reference data to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. Thus, when moving the main individual image and the sub individual image together, by utilizing the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data, position data for the main unit reference data is obtained. It is sufficient to adjust the control information to change the.

  Feature B2. It is possible to change the position data of the sub unit reference data without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data, The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

  According to the feature B2, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set between the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is set regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

  Feature B3. The unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image are in one-to-one correspondence, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is main among the corresponding unit reference data A game machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that the data relationship is set such that unit reference data and unit reference data of a sub individual image become sub unit reference data.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to associate the main individual image and the sub individual image in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature B4. The main individual image and the sub individual image are identical or substantially identical in the number and arrangement of unit reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

  According to the feature B4, at least one of the deformation data and the color data is used in common for the main individual image and the sub individual image, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary to store various data.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, wherein unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images is included in one reference data.

  According to the feature B5, the unit reference data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of individual images are integrated into one reference data, so the processing load is reduced with respect to the processing for reading out the reference data and the processing using the reference data It is possible to

Feature B6. The data generation unit is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating data for displaying an image on which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) operates. ,
The data capacity of the total of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual images. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

  According to the feature B6, even when a plurality of individual images are simultaneously displayed using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, data of the total of the reference data for displaying the plurality of individual images Since the capacity is equal to or less than the total data capacity of reference data for displaying a specific individual image, the amount of data to be processed is reduced with respect to derivation of information for controlling reference data and application of the derived information. And the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 for any one of the features B1 to B6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Arrangement means for arranging object data that is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function to execute the processing of step S2302 to step S2304 in VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135 Project the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint) and generate generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane Generation data for storing generation data generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152) having setting means for drawing (function to execute the processing of step S2310 to step S2312 in VDP 135) Storage means A buffer 142),
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means (the symbol display device 41);
In the gaming machine provided with
The arrangement unit is configured to generate a second individual image (ground image BG, step image) of a corresponding image (shadow image CH12, CH14) which is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image (effect character CH11, CH13). Corresponding object data (plate-like object data for plane shadows BSD, plate-like object data for step shadows SSD), which is object data for displaying the corresponding image, when displayed so as to overlap a part of SG) A game machine, wherein the game machine is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space separately from object data (ground object data BGD, stairs object data SGD) for displaying the second individual image.

  According to the feature C1, since the corresponding object data which is object data for displaying the corresponding image is set separately from the object data for displaying the second individual image, the second individual image is displayed Independent of the data setting of, it is possible to perform data setting for displaying the corresponding image. As a result, even when the corresponding image, which is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image, is displayed as being superimposed on a part of the second individual image, the display content of the corresponding image and Therefore, it is possible to set data for displaying the second individual image independently, and to facilitate design for displaying these images. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the corresponding object data is a plate-like polygon.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while suppressing an increase in data capacity required to store object data.

  Feature C3. In the feature C 1 or C 2, the arrangement unit arranges the corresponding object data so as to be separated from the object data for displaying the second individual image on the side where the display position is on the front side. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature C3, in the virtual three-dimensional space, the corresponding object data is not arranged so as to overlap with the object data for displaying the second individual image, but is arranged so as to be separated to the front side Therefore, it is possible to superimpose and display the corresponding image on the second individual image while using the configuration for determining the image to be displayed in relation to the arrangement position in the virtual three-dimensional space.

  Feature C4. The data generation unit is configured to change the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space accordingly when changing the position of the object data for displaying the first individual image in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3 comprising (a function of executing the processing of step S3112 and step S3313 in the display CPU 131).

  According to the feature C4, only by changing the display position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, it is possible to move and display the corresponding image by following the moving display of the first individual image.

Feature C5. The data generation means includes texture setting means (function to execute the process of step S2309 in VDP 135) for setting texture data to the object data,
When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the texture setting means sets first corresponding texture data (texture data for first plane shadow BST1) as texture data for displaying the corresponding image. When the display mode of the second individual image is set to the corresponding object data and the display mode of the second individual image is the second display mode, second corresponding texture data (texture data for second plane shadow BST2) as texture data for displaying the corresponding image The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the corresponding object data is set.

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image to the display mode of the first individual image only by switching the texture data set in the corresponding object data.

  Feature C6. When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the data generation unit uses the first shape data as shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data, and displays the first individual image. When the mode is the second display mode, means for using the second shape data as shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data (function to execute the processing of step S3309 to step S3311 in the display CPU 131) is provided. A game machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image by changing the shape data used for the corresponding object data.

Feature C7. The data generation means includes texture setting means (function to execute the process of step S2309 in VDP 135) for setting texture data to the object data,
The texture setting unit is configured to, when the display position of the first individual image is changed, correspond to texture data for displaying the corresponding image in a situation where the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is not changed. A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, comprising setting position changing means (function to execute the processing of step S3410 in the display CPU 131) for changing the setting position relationship with respect to object data.

  According to the feature C7, the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by causing the corresponding image to follow the moving display of the first individual image by changing the setting positional relationship of the texture data to the corresponding object data. It is possible to move and display the corresponding image even in a situation where it is not preferable.

  Feature C8. The shape data of the corresponding object data is set in correspondence with the shape data of the object data for displaying the second individual image corresponding to the area where the corresponding images are superimposed and displayed in the second individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7 characterized in that:

  According to the feature C8, since the corresponding object data is set to correspond to the shape of the object data for displaying the second individual image, the corresponding image is displayed using the corresponding object data. It is possible to preferably superimpose the corresponding image on the second individual image.

  In addition, by applying the configuration limited by the feature C7 in the configuration of the feature C8, the movement display of the corresponding image is performed by changing the setting positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data, and the second individual image The corresponding image can be moved and displayed without complicatedly moving the corresponding object data set in correspondence with the shape of the object data for displaying in the virtual three-dimensional space.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data (base moving image data BMD) used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means
A developing unit (processing of step S1303 in the VDP 76) for developing the moving image data in the development area (development buffer 81) and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings with respect to the image corresponding to the moving image data The function to be performed, the video decoder 93),
A moving image corresponding image (color change effect character CH1 corresponding to the moving image data by using still image data for a plurality of update timings expanded by the Moving image display execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1206 in the display CPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S1306 in the VDP 76);
Corresponding to the additional image data by reading the additional image data (first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3) from the storage means for display and using the additional image data when using the still image data Adding execution means (function to execute processing of step S1206 in display CPU 72, function to execute processing of step S1307 in VDP 76) for adding an additional individual image (color change target area CR) to the moving image corresponding image;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when displaying an image at one update timing, not only still image data obtained by expanding moving image data but also additional image data is used to support moving images An additional individual image is additionally displayed on the image. Thereby, even if it is necessary to change a part of the moving image correspondence image, for example, the moving image data can be used as it is by using the additional image data and responding to the partial change. It becomes possible. Also, for example, even when a plurality of types of moving images having different contents of part of the moving image correspondence image are required, moving image data can be obtained by using the additional image data to make the contents of the part different. There is no need to prepare multiple types. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature D2. A game machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the additional image data different at a plurality of update timings can be used so that the additional individual image can be changed at a plurality of update timings.

  According to the feature D2, since the additional image data different at the plurality of update timings can be used, the content of the additional individual image can be changed in accordance with the content of the moving picture compatible image.

  Feature D3. A game machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the additional image data corresponding to each of the still image data for the plurality of update timings can be used.

  According to the feature D3, it is possible to display an additional individual image corresponding to the content of the moving image corresponding image throughout the display period of the moving image corresponding image.

  Feature D4. The game machine according to feature D2 or D3, wherein the additional image data for a plurality of update timings is stored in advance in the display storage unit without being compressed as moving image data.

  According to the feature D4, the additional image data is stored as the moving image data without being compressed, and therefore, when the additional individual image is additionally displayed on the moving image compatible image, the expansion processing of a plurality of types of moving image data is performed simultaneously There is no need to do this.

  Feature D5. The gaming machine according to the feature D4, wherein data of a transparent value corresponding to semitransparent or transparent is set in the additional image data.

  According to the feature D5, since the data of the transparent value corresponding to the semitransparent or transparent is set in the additional image data, it is possible to perform the display using the transparent value in the additional display of the additional individual image. For example, it is possible to display an effect image as an additional individual image, and to display an image in which a predetermined portion is transparent or semitransparent as an additional individual image. In addition, since the additional image data having the configuration of the feature D4 and setting the transparent value data corresponding to the semitransparent or transparent is stored as the moving image data without being compressed, the image quality of the additional individual image is It is possible to prevent deterioration.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5, wherein the additional individual image corresponds to an image portion of a part of the moving picture correspondence image.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to change the contents of a part of the image portion of the moving picture correspondence image by using the additional individual image.

  Feature D7. The display control means is a color information changing means for changing color information to be applied to the additional image data (a function for executing the process of step S1204 in the display CPU 72, and executes the processes of steps S1305 and S1403 to S1406 in VDP 76 A game machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, characterized in that the game machine has a function.

  According to the feature D7, since the color information to be applied to the additional image data is changed, the image data is stored as compared to the configuration in which the additional image data is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of types of color information. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 for any one of the features D1 to D7. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
The image data is set in the setting storage unit (frame buffer 82) having a plurality of unit setting areas (unit areas 121) to create drawing data in the setting storage unit, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data. A display control unit (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on outputting the display unit to the display unit;
Equipped with
The display control means
When a plurality of individual images (effect effect character CH2, effect image EG2) are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, the unit in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display unit Regarding the data of the setting area, the near side image which is the image data of the overlapping part of the back individual image (character for effect effect CH2) is the image data of the overlapping part of the near individual image (effect image EG2) Duplicate reflection means (a function of executing the processing of step S1701, step S1709 and step S1710 in the VDP 76) for causing the data to be reflected;
When the back side image data is reflected on the front side image data by the overlapping reflection means, a reflection reduction means (VDP 76 reduces the reflection ratio of at least one of the front side image data and the back side image data A function of executing the processing of step S1705 to step S1708),
Equipped with
When the reflection reduction means reduces the reflection ratio of one of the reduction target image data among the front side image data and the back side image data, the reduction amount of one of the front side image data and the back side image data A game machine characterized by making the amount of reduction of the reflection ratio different according to the contents of reference image data.

  According to the feature E1, the overlapping reflection of the near side image data and the back side image data is performed in a state where the ratio of reflecting the reduction target image data is reduced. As a result, for example, in the case where the image display can not be satisfactorily performed if the front side image data and the rear side image data are reflected in duplicate as they are, the reflection ratio of at least one of the image data is reduced, It becomes possible to perform display well.

  In this case, the reduction amount of the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is made different according to the contents of the reduction amount reference image data. This makes it possible to reduce the reduction target image data in a mode according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data, as compared with the configuration in which the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is uniformly reduced, When this is done, fine adjustments can be made to further enhance the display effect.

  As described above, display control can be suitably performed.

  Note that, specifically, “the image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information that defines color information, as the configuration of the overlap reflection unit, and An arithmetic processing execution means for executing predetermined arithmetic processing using numerical information of respective unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images, data of an arithmetic result of the arithmetic processing, the storage for setting And means for setting processing execution means for setting unit setting areas corresponding to the mutually overlapping unit image data. And the numerical value information can be set within the range up to the limit numerical value, and the display control means has a unit that the larger the numerical value is set, The image signal is output so that bright colors are displayed in dots corresponding to a fixed area, and the arithmetic processing execution unit overlaps each other in the plurality of individual images as the predetermined arithmetic processing. There is a configuration in which an addition process of adding numerical information of each unit image data is executed.

Feature E2. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within the range up to the limit value,
The display control means is configured to output the image signal such that the brighter color is displayed on the dot of the display unit corresponding to the unit setting area as the larger numerical value is set as the numerical value information.
The reflection reduction means may reduce the numerical information relatively smaller in unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to unitary image data of the reduction amount reference image data in which the numerical value information is relatively larger. The gaming machine according to the feature E1, characterized in that the reduction amount of the reflection ratio is made larger than unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to unit image data of amount reference image data.

  According to the feature E2, since the brighter color is displayed as the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which the large numerical value numerical information is set, the display control of the dot can be prevented from being complicated. In this case, the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data having a relatively large numerical information has a unit image of the reduction amount reference image data having a relatively small numerical information. The reduction amount of the reflection ratio is larger than the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the data. As a result, the amount of reduction of the reflection rate is increased by giving priority to not reaching the limit value for the part that may reach the limit value of the unit setting area when the image data of each individual image is duplicated and reflected. The reduction amount of the reflection ratio can be reduced by giving priority to overlapping and reflecting the contents of the image data of each individual image for a portion which does not reach the limit numerical value.

Feature E3. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The reflection reduction means is characterized in that the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is reduced by the reduction amount of the reflection ratio according to each of numerical information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2.

  According to the feature E3, since it is possible to adjust the reduction amount of the reflection rate in units of unit image data, it is possible to finely adjust the portion where the reduction of the reflection rate is prioritized and the portion where the overlap reflection is prioritized. It becomes possible.

Feature E4. The unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within the range up to the limit value,
The image data has a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information within the range up to the limit numerical value,
The reflection reduction means sets the unit image data to a value obtained by dividing the value obtained by subtracting the color information of the unit image data contained in the reduction amount reference image data from the limit value by the limit value. In any one of the features E1 to E3, the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is reduced by integrating the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the target unit setting area. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio according to the contents of the reduction amount reference image data by using each image data itself which is an object of overlapping reflection. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the data capacity for storing various data in advance.

  Feature E5. The reduction target image data of which the reflection ratio is reduced by using the reduction amount reference image data is image data on the side different from the reduction target image data among the near side image data and the back side image data. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4 characterized by having a certain feature.

  According to the feature E5, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio of the image data in accordance with the content of the image data on the other side of the overlapping reflection.

  Feature E6. The game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein the reduction amount reference image data is the near side image data, and the reduction target image data is the far side image data.

  According to the feature E6, as compared with the configuration in which the reflection ratio of the back side image data is uniformly reduced, the back side image data can be reflected in a mode according to the contents of the front side individual image, and the image data overlap When performing reflection, it is possible to make fine adjustments to further enhance the display effect.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 for any one of the features E1 to E6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Arrangement means for arranging object data that is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function to execute the processing of step S2302 to step S2304 in VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135 Project the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint) and generate generation data (drawing data) based on the projection data projected onto the projection plane Generation for storing the generated data generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having setting means for drawing (function to execute the processing of step S2310 to step S2312 in VDP 135) Data storage means And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display section (display surface P) of the display means (symbol display device 41);
In the gaming machine provided with
A game machine characterized in that the data generation means is provided with a transparency value setting means (function to execute the processing of step S3815 in VDP 135) for setting a transparency value corresponding to semi-transparency to the projection data.

  According to the feature F1, since the transparent value corresponding to the semitransparent is set after the creation of the projection data, the final semitransparent image display can be performed without making the object data semitransparent. It becomes possible. If you create projection data after making object data translucent, there is a possibility that the image part on the back side you do not want to display as object data may be displayed, and try to create projection data while avoiding it. Processing may be complicated. On the other hand, since it is possible to finally display a semi-transparent image without making the object data into a semi-transparent state, it is possible to preferably perform the semi-transparent image display. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature F2. The data generation means is configured to make the semitransparent to object data for displaying an individual image (symbol display portions CH16 to CH18) to be set as the transparent value corresponding to the semitransparent by the transparent value setting means. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the corresponding transparent value is not set.

  According to the feature F2, since the object data is not in a semi-transparent state, it is possible to prevent an image portion on the back side which is not originally desired to be displayed as the object data from being displayed. Since the configuration of the feature F1 is set to set the transparency value corresponding to the translucent to the projection data, the translucent image is displayed while preventing the above inconvenience. Is possible.

Feature F3. The data generation means
When displaying a plurality of individual images (effect character CH15, symbol display portions CH16 to CH18), predetermined projection data corresponding to the individual images of a part of the plurality of individual images are created, and separately from that, the plurality of the plurality An individual creation unit that creates the specific projection data corresponding to the individual image not included in the predetermined projection data among the individual images (Step S3802, Step S3803, Step S3805, Step S3806, Step S3808, Step S3809, Step S3811 in VDP 135) And a function of executing the process of step S3812),
Generation execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3816 in the VDP 135) for setting the predetermined projection data in a mode according to the transparency value to the storage area in which the specific projection data is set;
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, comprising:

  According to the feature F3, a plurality of individual projection data are created only by creating projection data a plurality of times, and setting a transparency value corresponding to semi-transparency to a part of the projection data and combining the plurality of projection data The image can be displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, and the content of the overlapping portion of the back individual images can be reflected in the overlapping portion of the front individual images.

Feature F4. The individual creation means is
Data creating means (steps S3802, S3805, S3808 and S3811 in VDP 135) sequentially creating each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in the projection data storage means (drawing buffer BF1) And the ability to perform
A unit (step S3803, step S3806, step S3809 and step S3812 in VDP 135) for writing the projection data created in the storage unit for projection data into the storage unit (first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5) is executed. Function),
The gaming machine according to feature F3, comprising:

  According to the feature F4, in a configuration in which a plurality of projection data are generated and then the generated projection data is generated by combining the projection data, it is possible to integrate the storage unit to be the projection data generation destination into the projection data storage unit It becomes. As a result, since it is not necessary to change the storage means of the creation destination when creating the projection data, the process design can be facilitated. Further, since the storage storage means for storing the projection data created in the projection data storage means is provided, it is possible to separately save the created projection data until the time of synthesis execution.

Feature F5. The individual creation unit is configured to create each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in a projection data storage unit (drawing buffer BF1).
The projection data storage means has a plurality of projection unit storage areas,
Each of the projection unit storage areas is configured to be able to set color information and information of transparency value,
The individual creation means creates the predetermined projection data after setting the information of the transparency value corresponding to transparency as the information of the transparency value of each projection unit storage area in the projection data storage means, and displays the predetermined projection data In the projection unit storage area in which data corresponding to the target individual image is written, transparency value information corresponding to opacity is set as transparency value information, and in the other projection unit storage areas, transparency is used as the transparency value information. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein information on the corresponding transparency value is maintained.

  According to the feature F5, since projection information is created in the projection data storage unit after the information of the transparency value corresponding to transparency is set in each projection unit area in the projection data storage unit, the projection data In the above, it is possible to make the information of the transparency value of the portion where the individual image is not drawn transparent without performing post-processing after creation of the projection data. As a result, even if the generated data is generated by simply superposing a plurality of projection data in the end, the data portion of the individual image to be projected in each projection data is overwritten by the blank data portion. It becomes possible not to go wrong.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F5 One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means includes, as image data for displaying a predetermined image (effect image EG6 for increase), first predetermined image data (image data for normal effect ED5) and the first predetermined image data. The second predetermined image data (image data for simplified effect ED6) whose resolution is set to be low is stored,
The display control means enlarges the second predetermined image data so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as the case where the first predetermined image data is used even when the second predetermined image data is used. A game machine characterized by comprising image enlargement means (function to execute the process of step S2109 in VDP 76).

  According to the feature G1, not only the first predetermined image data but also the second predetermined image data whose resolution is set lower than that of the first predetermined image data is stored as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. When the second predetermined image data is used, the second predetermined image data is enlarged and used so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as the case where the first predetermined image data is used. As a result, when displaying a predetermined image in a high image quality state, the first predetermined image data is used, and the time required for reading out the image data needs to be shortened even if the image quality is lowered. It is possible to use predetermined image data. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform data setting for displaying a predetermined image in the mode according to a situation, and it becomes possible to perform display control suitably.

  Feature G2. It is necessary for the image enlargement means to magnify the second predetermined image data by the difference between the processing time required to read the first predetermined image data and the processing time required to read the second predetermined image data The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the processing time is shorter.

  According to the feature G2, it is possible to make the processing time in the case of using the second predetermined image data read out and enlarging it shorter than the processing time in which the first predetermined image data is read out and used. Thus, by using the second predetermined image data in a situation where the processing load is large, it becomes possible to display a predetermined image even in a situation where the processing load is large.

Feature G3. The image enlargement unit stores the image data after enlargement after enlarging the second predetermined image data in a predetermined storage unit (development buffer 81).
The display control means uses the post-enlarged image data stored in the predetermined storage means in a period in which the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data. The gaming machine described in G2.

  According to the feature G3, after enlarging the second predetermined image data, the enlarged image data is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so the process in the case where the second predetermined image data is used over a plurality of update timings It is possible to reduce the load.

  Feature G4. The display control means uses the first predetermined image data from a state in which the image data after enlargement by the image enlargement means of the second predetermined image data is used as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. The use object setting unit (the function of executing the processing of step S2015 to step S2020 in display CPU 72, the function of executing the processing of step S2111 in VDP 76) for switching to the operating state; any of features G1 to G3 characterized by The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to switch from the situation where the second predetermined image data is used to reduce the processing load to the situation where the first predetermined image data is used to improve the image quality while continuing the display of the predetermined image It becomes.

  Feature G5. When the display of the predetermined image is started at a timing when the number of individual images displayed on the display unit increases, the use target setting unit may use the image data after enlargement as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. The game machine according to feature G4, characterized in that image data for displaying the predetermined image is switched to the first predetermined image data after that.

  According to the feature G5, when it is intended to start display of a predetermined image at a timing when the number of individual images increases, the time required for reading out the image data at that timing may locally increase for a long time, At the timing, by displaying the predetermined image using the image data after enlargement after enlarging the second predetermined image data, it is possible to suppress an increase in time required for the readout. On the other hand, by using the first predetermined image data after the timing, it is possible to read the first predetermined image data and improve the image quality of the predetermined image in a situation where there is time for reading the image data. It becomes.

  Feature G6. The display control means, when displaying the predetermined image using the first predetermined image data, changes the display mode of the predetermined image by using different first predetermined image data at a plurality of update timings. In the case of displaying the predetermined image using second predetermined image data, the gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5, wherein the display mode of the predetermined image is not changed.

  According to the feature G6, when the predetermined image is displayed using the first predetermined image data, the display content can be prevented from becoming uniform by changing the display mode of the predetermined image. When a predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, it is possible to give priority to the reduction of the processing load.

  Feature G7. A plurality of first predetermined image data are provided so that the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed over a plurality of update timings, and only one second predetermined image data is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6.

  According to the feature G7, only one second predetermined image data is provided while the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed by providing a plurality of first predetermined image data. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration in the case of displaying a predetermined image using predetermined image data.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 for any one of the features G1 to G7. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
An image is displayed on the display unit using generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and the content of the image is updated by the update timing. Display control means (VDP 135),
Equipped with
The data generation unit is configured to display a plurality of individual images including the first specified individual image (A character CH8 for loop effect) and the second specified individual image (B character CH9 for loop effect) on the display unit. Starting execution of information derivation processing (processing for interpolation display period) to derive first display information (coordinate data) necessary to change the display mode of the first specific individual image. Derivation processing execution means (function to execute processing for interpolation display period in display CPU 131) for starting execution of the information derivation processing in order to derive second display information necessary for changing the display mode of the individual image,
The derivation process execution means derives predetermined display information, which is one of the first display information and the second display information, when the period from one update timing to the next update timing is a specific period. The execution of the information derivation process is started in a predetermined specific period, and the execution of the information derivation process for deriving specific display information that is the other of the first display information and the second display information is A game machine characterized by starting in the specific period after the specific period.

  According to the feature H1, the display mode of the first specified individual image and the second specified individual image is in a situation where a plurality of individual images including the first specified individual image and the second specified individual image are displayed on the display unit. When it changes, the derivation | leading-out start of 1st display information required in order to change the said display aspect and the derivation | leading-out start of 2nd display information are performed in a different specific period. As a result, compared to a configuration in which the derivation start of the first display information and the derivation start of the second display information are performed in the same specific period, an event that the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period does not occur. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably change the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, and it is possible to preferably perform display control.

  Feature H2. The game according to the feature H1 characterized in that the derivation process execution means starts execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information in the next specific period with respect to the predetermined specific period. Machine.

  According to the feature H2, an event occurs in which the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period while minimizing the difference between the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information It will be possible not to

  Feature H3. When the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information is started, the display control means does not start the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information. The game according to the feature H1 or H2 characterized in that the display using the predetermined display information is started on the side to which the predetermined display information is to be used among the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image Machine.

  According to the feature H3, even when the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information are intentionally shifted, the display modes of the first specified individual image and the second specified individual image It is possible to start changes early on.

Feature H4. The display control means causes the first specific individual image to display a first predetermined action (a first loop effect form of an A character CH8 for loop effect) and a first specific action (interpolated display of an A character CH8 for loop effect) The second specific individual image displays the second predetermined individual action display (the first loop effect aspect of the B character CH9 for loop effect) and the second specific individual action image for the B character CH9 for loop effect Update the contents of the image to perform the interpolation display period aspect),
The first display information is information for performing the first specific operation display, and the second display information is information for performing the second specific operation display. Features H1 to H3 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature H4, even if the start timing of the specific operation display of the first specified individual image and the second specified individual image deviates by shifting the specified period to start derivation of each display information, the first specified individual image and Since each of the second specific individual images is configured to perform the specific action display following the predetermined action display, the content of the deviation can also be recognized by the player as a series of contents of the action display. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the processing load while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature H5. The operation mode of the first specified individual image and the operation mode of the second specified individual image are different at the timing when the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information is started. The gaming machine according to the feature H4.

  According to the feature H5, the information derivation process is executed even if the start timing of the specific operation display of the first specified individual image and the second specified individual image deviates by shifting the specified period to start the derivation of each display information. By the difference between the operation mode of the first specific individual image and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the start timing, the difference in the operation mode makes the deviation of the start timing less noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the processing load while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H6. The operation mode of the first specified individual image at the timing when the first predetermined operation display ends is a predetermined mode, and the operation mode of the second specified individual image at the timing when the second predetermined operation display ends. In a predetermined manner,
The gaming machine according to the feature H4 or H5, wherein the predetermined display information is the first display information, and the specific display information is the second display information.

  According to the feature H6, by which of the first display information and the second display information to start the information derivation process is determined in advance, the target to start the information derivation process earlier is changed according to the situation The processing configuration can be simplified in that it is not necessary to In addition, since the operation mode of each specific individual image at the timing when the predetermined operation display ends is determined, it is previously determined from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is to be started. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player who has visually recognized the display content from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H7. The first specific individual image performs the first predetermined operation display, and the second specific individual image performs the second predetermined operation display. The switching trigger occurring irregularly occurs. The first specific operation display and the second specific operation display are started,
The derivation process execution means is a destination start determination means for determining a target of the first display information and the second display information to start the information derivation process earlier according to the timing when the switching trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to the feature H4 or H5, comprising: a function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the CPU 131).

  According to the feature H7, since the switching trigger from the situation of performing the predetermined action display to the situation of performing the specific action display occurs irregularly, it is possible to diversify the display content. In this case, since it is determined from which of the first display information and the second display information to start the information derivation process according to the timing when the switching trigger occurs, it is specified in the order in which it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. It becomes possible to start the operation display.

Feature H8. The data generation means
Means for deriving information for causing the first specified individual image to perform the first predetermined operation display according to the first predetermined operation information (the first animation data AD1 for A character) stored in advance (step in display CPU 131 Function to execute the processing of S2407),
The first special action display (second loop effect mode of A character CH8 for loop effect) is performed on the first specified individual image according to the first special action information (second animation data AD2 for A character) stored in advance. A unit for deriving information for causing the display (a function of executing the processing of step S2407 in the display CPU 131);
Means for deriving information for causing the second specified individual image to display the second predetermined operation according to the second predetermined operation information (the first animation data AD3 for B character) stored in advance (step in display CPU 131 Function to execute the processing of S2407),
The second special action display (the second loop effect mode of the B character CH9 for loop effect) is performed on the second specific individual image according to the second special action information (the second animation data AD4 for B character) stored in advance. A unit for deriving information for causing the display (a function of executing the processing of step S2407 in the display CPU 131);
Equipped with
The first specific operation display is performed after the first predetermined operation display is performed and before the first special operation display is performed.
The second specific operation display is performed after the second predetermined operation display is performed and before the second special operation display is performed.
The derivation process execution means derives the first display information by executing the information derivation process using the first predetermined operation information and the first special operation information, and the second predetermined operation information The gaming machine according to any one of the features H4 to H7, wherein the second display information is derived by executing the information deriving process using the second special operation information.

  According to the feature H8, the specific operation display is performed based on the information stored using the predetermined operation information and the special operation information stored in advance, between each predetermined operation display and each special operation display. It is possible to smoothly change the display content from the state in which the predetermined operation display is performed to the state in which the special operation display is performed while suppressing the amount of information necessary to store information in advance. However, if processing for deriving display information using predetermined operation information and special operation information is collectively performed in one specific period, there is a risk that the processing load may become extremely large. With the above configuration, the derivation of the display information is started in different specific periods between the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, so that the processing load can be distributed.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H8. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
A display control unit (VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display unit using generation data (drawing data) generated by data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152);
Equipped with
The data generation unit reads out color specification image data (texture data for background GTD1) having a plurality of unit data associated with numerical information that specifies color information from the display storage unit (memory module 133). Is configured to generate the generated data by
The display storage unit stores, in advance, adjustment data (first refraction texture data GTD2 and second refraction texture data GTD3) having a plurality of unit data in the same manner as the color definition image data,
The data generation means uses numerical value information derived from the unit data of the adjustment data as predetermined adjustment information different from color information, thereby displaying the corresponding individual image displayed using the color specification image data. A game machine characterized by comprising content adjustment means (function to execute the processing of step S4103 to step S4107 in the VDP 135) for adjusting display content.

  According to the feature I1, since the display content of the corresponding individual image is adjusted by using the predetermined adjustment information, it is possible to diversify the display content while using the same color definition image data. In this case, the predetermined adjustment information is derived using adjustment data having a plurality of unit data as in the color specification image data. This makes it possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image by using the adjustment data stored in the display storage unit as data similar to the color specification image data, and the color specification image data has a data format As compared with the configuration in which the adjustment data is prepared as different data, it is possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image while sharing the processing for reading out the data and the processing for temporarily storing after reading out. . Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

Feature I2. The unit data includes a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
The content adjusting unit may specify the predetermined adjustment information by using numerical value information derived from a plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I2, the content of the predetermined adjustment information can be finely controlled by deriving the predetermined adjustment information using a plurality of base color correspondence information set in the unit data of the adjustment data .

Feature I3. The unit data includes a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
The content adjustment means may specify the predetermined adjustment information using numerical value information derived from a part of a plurality of base color corresponding data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature I3, all the base color correspondence data is used by deriving predetermined adjustment information using a part of the plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. As compared with the configuration in which the predetermined adjustment information is derived, the processing load for deriving the predetermined adjustment information can be reduced.

Feature I4. The data generation means
Arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of step S2302 to step S2304 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S2306 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for projecting the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane (performing processing of step S2310 to step S2312 in VDP 135 Function),
Have
The game machine according to any one of the features I1 to I3, wherein the color definition image data is texture data set for the object data.

  According to the feature I4, it is possible to derive predetermined adjustment information by using adjustment data prepared as texture data.

  Feature I5. The content adjustment means adjusts the content of the unit data in the texture data instead of adjusting the content of the object data by using the predetermined adjustment information. Machine.

  According to the feature I5, since the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted without adjusting the content of the object data using the predetermined adjustment information, the adjustment target is not the three-dimensional information but the two-dimensional It becomes possible to use information, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load for performing adjustment.

  Feature I6. The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the content adjusting means adjusts the content of the texture data using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before setting to the object data.

  According to the feature I6, since it is possible to perform the adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information without being affected by the data state after setting the texture data as the object data, the adjustment becomes easy to perform.

  Feature I7. The content adjusting unit causes distortion display of the corresponding individual image displayed using the color specification image data by using the predetermined adjustment information, according to any one of the features I1 to I6. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I7, it is possible to perform distortion display of the corresponding individual image by using the adjustment data stored in the display storage unit as data similar to the color specification image data.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 for any one of the features I1 to I7. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Arrangement means for arranging object data that is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (function to execute the processing of step S2302 to step S2304 in VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135 Project the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint) and generate generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane Generation data storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing the generation data generated by the data generation means having the drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of step S2310 to step S2312 in the VDP 135);
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means (the symbol display device 41);
In the gaming machine provided with
The data generation means does not adjust the contents of object data (plate-like object data GSD for background) based on predetermined adjustment information, but texture data (texture data for background GD1) set for the object data The content adjustment unit adjusts the display content of the corresponding individual image displayed using the object data and the texture data by adjusting the content of the above based on the predetermined adjustment information (the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 in VDP 135 is executed Game machine characterized by having the following functions.

  According to the feature J1, since the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted without adjusting the content of the object data using the predetermined adjustment information, the adjustment target is not the three-dimensional information but the two-dimensional It becomes possible to use information, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load for performing adjustment. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature J2. The game machine according to Feature J1, wherein the content adjustment means adjusts the content of the texture data using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before setting to the object data.

  According to the feature J2, since it is possible to perform adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information without being affected by the data state after setting the texture data as the object data, the adjustment becomes easy to perform.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 for any one of the features J1 to J2 One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature A group-the above-mentioned feature J group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. First control means (sound light side MPU 62) for determining the execution content of the effect;
Second control means (display CPU 72) for controlling the effect executing means (the symbol display device 41) based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The arrangement is such that, when the predetermined execution opportunity occurs, the effect execution means (preliminary display) is executed in the effect execution means,
The said opportunity corresponding | compatible production | presentation has two or more presentation elements (content of 2nd type) in which the fluctuation | variation object content which is at least one of the presence or absence and the content fluctuates,
The configuration is such that the execution pattern of the above-mentioned trigger response rendering differs depending on the combination pattern of the variation target contents for the plurality of rendering elements,
The first control means, when transmitting transmission information for executing the trigger correspondence rendering, correspondence transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2) corresponding to the fluctuation target content of a predetermined rendering element , Third command data CD3) and information to distinguish and transmit corresponding transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2, third command data CD3) corresponding to the content to be changed of another rendering element A game machine characterized by comprising transmission means (function to execute command selection processing in the sound light side MPU 62).

  According to the feature K1, since the execution pattern of the trigger-based effect is different depending on the combination pattern of the change target content of the plurality of effect elements, it is possible to diversify the effect content of the trigger-based effect. In this case, since the first correspondence transmission information corresponding to the change target content of the predetermined rendering element and the second correspondence transmission information corresponding to the change target content of the other effect elements are separately transmitted, Even when the number of effect elements is increased or decreased, or when the content to be changed is changed, it is possible to change the corresponding transmission information in the unit of the corresponding effect element, thereby facilitating the design of the transmission information. .

  Feature K2. The gaming machine according to the feature K1, wherein each of the predetermined effect element and the other effect element determines an effect content to be simultaneously executed.

  According to the feature K2, even for a plurality of effect elements that determine effect content to be executed simultaneously, corresponding transmission information for causing the second control means to specify fluctuation target content of those effect elements is for each type of effect element Since the configuration is such that the transmission information can be transmitted, the design of transmission information can be facilitated.

  Feature K3. The first control means is an end transmission means (step S509 in the sound light side MPU 62) for transmitting the end transmission information (end command) indicating that all the correspondence transmission information necessary for causing the trigger correspondence presentation to have been transmitted. A game machine according to feature K1 or K2, characterized in that it has a function of performing the processing of

  According to the feature K3, in the configuration in which the corresponding transmission information is transmitted in units of effect elements, the end transmission information is transmitted when all the corresponding transmission information necessary for causing the trigger corresponding effect to be executed is transmitted. It is possible to make the second control means recognize that the transmission of all the correspondence transmission information necessary to execute the trigger response rendering has been completed without fixing the number of effect elements included in the trigger response rendering. Become.

Feature K4. The second control means is
Storage execution means (function of executing command interrupt processing in the display CPU 72) for storing the received corresponding transmission information in the information storage means (command storage buffer 101);
Reference information for setting reference information (execution target table) to be used to execute the above-mentioned trigger response presentation corresponding to a plurality of corresponding transmission information stored in the information storage means when the end transmission information is received Setting means (function of executing command corresponding processing in display CPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature K3, comprising:

  According to the feature K4, the second control means is configured to set the reference information to be used to execute the opportunity response presentation after receiving all the correspondence transmission information necessary to execute the opportunity response presentation. Instead of setting the reference information corresponding to each of the change target contents of the effect element, it becomes possible to set one reference information corresponding to all of the change target contents of all the effect elements.

  Feature K5. The corresponding transmission information includes outline information (first command data CD1) for specifying the contents of the outline of the rendering element corresponding to the correspondence transmission information, and branch contents included in the contents of the outline corresponding to the outline information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4, comprising branch information (second command data CD2, third command data CD3) for specifying which one of them is to be executed.

  According to the feature K5, since the corresponding transmission information of one is divided into the outline information and the branch information, the design of the corresponding transmission information of one can be facilitated.

  Feature K6. The game machine according to Feature K5, wherein the second control means grasps different contents from the branch information according to the contents of the outline information even if the contents of the same branch information are the same.

  According to the feature K6, since the branch information is commonly used among the plurality of corresponding transmission information, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the transmission correspondence information in advance.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the feature K group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, there is known a configuration in which control corresponding to the command is executed by the other control means using the command transmitted from one control means.

  For example, in a pachinko machine, the control means for effect is executed based on the command transmitted from the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and the effect control is performed by the control means for one effect or the control means for one effect A configuration is known in which execution control of effects is performed by control means for other effects based on the command.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, it is necessary to optimize the configuration of transmission information to be transmitted from one control means to another control means in order to execute an effect. There is room for improvement.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Operation execution means (function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72) that starts operation processing using operation information (execution target table) when a start trigger occurs;
Result utilization means (a function for executing the process of step S609 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76) that executes a specific process using the calculation result of the arithmetic process;
Equipped with
When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing at a predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is ended halfway, the arithmetic execution means performs the predetermined processing at the next execution time with respect to the predetermined execution time. A re-execution unit (function to execute the processing of step S606, step S610 and step S916 in the display CPU 72) for executing the arithmetic processing using the information for calculation set as a use target at the execution time A game machine characterized by having

  According to the feature L1, when the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing, the arithmetic processing is ended halfway, so the processing time of the arithmetic processing fluctuates and the execution of the other processing is largely restricted. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event of being In addition, when the arithmetic processing is ended halfway, in the arithmetic processing of the next execution cycle, the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information to be used in the arithmetic processing ended halfway is executed again. As a result, even if the arithmetic processing can be terminated halfway, execution of the arithmetic processing using each piece of arithmetic information can be completed.

  Feature L2. The game according to the feature L1, characterized in that the re-execution means resumes the arithmetic processing from the content in the middle of ending at the predetermined execution time at the next execution time for the predetermined execution time. Machine.

  According to the feature L2, when the operation process using the operation information to be used in the previous execution cycle is executed again, the operation process is resumed from the content in the middle of the previous execution cycle. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time required to finish the operation processing resumed in the new execution cycle.

Feature L3. The arithmetic processing includes a plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing (steps S902, S903, S906, S909, and S912 to S914), and the plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing are sequentially executed in each execution of the arithmetic processing. The target configuration is
The gaming machine according to the feature L2, characterized in that the arithmetic execution means ends the current arithmetic processing after the individual arithmetic processing ends even if the condition to be ended is satisfied during execution of the individual arithmetic processing. .

  According to the feature L3, even if the arithmetic processing is ended halfway, it is not ended in the middle of the individual arithmetic processing. Therefore, complication of information setting processing for resuming the arithmetic processing halfway It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L4. The arithmetic processing is periodically executed as part of periodic processing (V interrupt processing) in which an execution condition is satisfied,
The game according to any one of the features L1 to L3 characterized in that the calculation execution means ends the calculation process in the middle by the execution condition being satisfied as the end condition in the middle of the calculation process. Machine.

  According to the feature L4, it is possible to complete the execution of the calculation process using each calculation information while securing the periodic execution of the periodic process.

  Feature L5. The arithmetic execution means, even when the arithmetic processing is ended halfway in the predetermined number of executions, when a priority event (set of execution target table for notification) has occurred, the predetermined The above operation using the operation information corresponding to the priority event, not using the operation information set as the use target in the predetermined execution cycle in the next execution cycle with respect to the execution cycle A game machine according to any one of features L1 to L4 characterized by performing a process.

  According to the feature L5, priority is given to the execution of the calculation process using the calculation information corresponding to the priority event over the resumption of the calculation process using the calculation information in the calculation process ended halfway. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while not delaying the execution of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information corresponding to.

  Feature L6. The specific control means having the operation execution means transmits the reexecution correspondence information (delay command) when the reexecution of the arithmetic processing is to be performed by the reexecution means The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L5, comprising a function of executing the processing of step S611 in the CPU 72.

  According to the feature L6, the re-execution correspondence information is transmitted when the arithmetic processing in the predetermined execution time is ended halfway and the arithmetic processing is executed again in the next execution time. It becomes possible to make other operations correspond to re-execution of the arithmetic processing.

Feature L7. A predetermined control means (sound light side MPU 62) is provided separately from the specific control means,
The predetermined control means is provided with processing adjustment means (function for executing display side command correspondence processing in the sound light side MPU 62) which adjusts the execution content of the predetermined processing when the re-execution correspondence information is received. The gaming machine according to the feature L6.

  According to the feature L7, when the re-execution of the arithmetic processing is performed, the content of execution of the predetermined processing in the predetermined control means is adjusted, so that the processing content of the specific processing can be associated with the processing content of the predetermined processing It becomes.

Feature L8. The result utilization means performs execution control of the effect in the specific effect execution means (the symbol display device 41) using the calculation result of the calculation process as the specific process.
The game machine according to Feature L7, wherein the predetermined control means controls execution of an effect in the predetermined effect execution means (the display light emitting unit 44, the speaker unit 45) as the predetermined process.

  According to the feature L8, when the derivation of the calculation result is delayed in the calculation process executed to control the execution of the effect in the specific effect execution means, the execution is performed to perform the execution control of the effect in the predetermined effect execution means Since the process content of the predetermined process to be performed is also adjusted, it is possible to mutually correspond the contents of the effects in the effect execution means.

  Feature L9. The result utilization means performs the calculation in an execution cycle before the predetermined execution cycle when the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic process and ends the calculation process in the predetermined execution cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L8, wherein the specific process is executed using a calculation result of a process.

  According to the feature L9, when the calculation process is ended halfway, the specific process is not executed using the contents in the middle of the calculation, but the calculation result of the calculation process completed before that Since the specific process is executed using the above, it is possible to prevent the execution content of the specific process from becoming an abnormal content.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A9, the feature B1 to B6, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D7, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F5, the feature G1 to G7 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L9. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I7, the features J1 to J2, the features K1 to K6, and the features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the feature L group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are equipped with a control means in which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program is stored is mounted, and a game is played through execution of arithmetic processing in the control means Control is in place to enable that. There is also known a configuration in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted in the control means, but are integrated in the control means.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, a configuration capable of suitably executing the arithmetic processing in the control means is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Symbol display apparatus 44 ... Display light emission part, 45 ... Speaker part, 62 ... Sound light side MPU, 72 ... Display CPU, 74 ... Memory module, 76 ... VDP, 81 ... Expansion buffer, 82 ... frame buffer, 93 ... moving image decoder, 101 ... command storage buffer, 121 ... unit area, 122 ... pixel, 131 ... display CPU, 133 ... memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142 ... frame buffer, 151 ... geometry operation unit, 152 ... Rendering unit, 169 ... Area for coordinate calculation, ABD 1 to ABD 50 ... Bone data, AD 1 to AD 4 ... Animation data, BF 1 ... Drawing buffer, BF 2 to BF 5 ... Storage buffer, BG ... Ground image, BGD ... Ground object data , BMD ... Base movie data, BOD 1-B D50: bone data, BSD: plate-like object data for plane shadow, BST1: texture data for first plane shadow, BST2: texture data for second plane shadow, BTD1: texture data, BTD2: texture data for aggregation, CD1 to CD3 ... Command data, CH 1 ... Color change effect character, CH 2 ... Effect effect character, CH 8 ... Loop effect A character, CH 9 ... Loop effect B character, CH 10 ... Bone display character, CH 11 ... Effect character, CH 12 ... Shadow image, CH13: character for presentation, CH14: shadow image, CH15: character for presentation, CH16 to CH18: symbol display part, CHG1 to CHG5, group unit character, CR: color change target area, ED5: image data for normal effect , ED6 ... Image data for easy effect, EG2 ... effect image, EG6 ... effect image for increase, FRD 1 ... skeletal data, FRD 2 ... skeletal data for aggregation, GSD ... plate-like object data for background, GTD 1 ... texture data for background, GTD2, GTD3 ... Texture data for refraction, P ... Display surface, PD1 to PD3 ... Parts image data, SG ... Stair image, SGD ... Object data for stairs, SKD1 ... Skin data, SKD2 ... Skin data for aggregation, SSD ... Plate shape for step shadow Object data.

Claims (2)

Display means having a display unit;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage unit having a plurality of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage unit, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display unit. Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
Equipped with
The unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within the range up to the limit value,
The image data has a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information within the range up to the limit numerical value,
The display control means
When displaying a plurality of individual images so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, data of the unit setting area in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display unit Overlapping reflection means for causing back side image data, which is image data of the overlapping portion, to be reflected on the front side image data, which is image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual images,
When the back side image data is reflected on the front side image data by the overlapping reflection means, the reflection ratio of one of the reduction target image data of the front side image data and the back side image data is the front side Reflection reduction means for reducing the reduction amount according to the content of one of the reduction amount reference image data of the side image data and the back side image data
Equipped with
The reflection reduction means sets the unit image data to a value obtained by dividing the value obtained by subtracting the color information of the unit image data contained in the reduction reference image data from the limit value by the limit value. By integrating the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit setting area to be reduced, thereby reducing the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data,
A game machine characterized in that there is a case where reduction by the reflection reduction means is performed and a case where it is not performed even when the same front side individual image is displayed on the display unit.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is performed using a gaming medium.

Images